JP5083740B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention provides a display unit for displaying an image, a winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a winning determination means for the player. Profit granting state control means for controlling to a profit granting state for giving a profit to the player after displaying a specific display mode on the display unit based on the determination that the profit should be given. It is about.

  Conventionally, a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine provided with a symbol display device generally displays a special symbol (symbol) in a variable manner on the symbol display device, and the bonus game state when the display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol Is supposed to occur. Also, in such a pachinko machine, whether or not a big hit symbol is derived as a special symbol display result by displaying a predetermined character or the like on the symbol display device before the special symbol display result is derived. There is one that executes a notice effect that informs in advance whether or not (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-56896 (FIG. 26)

  However, in the pachinko machine described above, the notice effect is executed in connection with the derivation of the jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is derived as a display result of the special symbol, the big hit expectation degree (the jackpot symbol is The probability that the announcement effect with a high probability) is executed is high, but generally the probability that the big hit symbol is derived (hit probability) is about 1/315, so that the high hit reliability is expected during normal games. The production was not performed frequently.

  In addition, not only when a big hit symbol is derived, but also when a loss symbol is derived, a notice effect with a low degree of big hit expectation is executed. In this case, even if a notice effect with a low expectation degree of jackpot is executed, the jackpot symbol is hardly derived. Therefore, the player cannot improve the sense of expectation that the big hit symbol is derived even if the notice effect with a low degree of big hit expectation is executed.

  For the reasons described above, even if the player pays attention to the notice effect, the player cannot improve the sense of expectation that the big hit symbol is derived, and may lose interest in the notice effect. Therefore, when a player plays a game for a long time, the interest in the notice effect is lost, so that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game may be reduced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and the object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can execute a notice effect that does not cause the player to lose interest and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. It is to provide.

In the gaming machine according to claim 1, a display unit for displaying an image;
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied ;
Profit grant state control for controlling to a profit grant state for giving a profit to the player after displaying a specific display mode on the display unit based on the determination that the win should be given to the player by the winning judgment means A gaming machine comprising means,
Components constituting the gaming machine body;
An effect device that is attached to the component member and forms an effect region where an effect operation is performed on a part of the component member as viewed from the player,
A main control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the main game of the gaming machine;
Peripheral control means equipped with a microcomputer that performs control based on a command signal transmitted from the main control means,
The stage device is
The display unit displaying the image from the production area toward the front side;
A plurality of types of effect members that can be driven to an appearance position that is visible to the player and a standby position that is not visible to the player in the effect area, and that simulate a plurality of types of character information; ,
The main control means includes
The winning determination means, the profit grant state control means,
Display pattern storage for storing a plurality of types of display patterns from when the display unit starts display control of the image and displaying the first display mode after a predetermined period of time until the determination result by the winning determination unit is displayed. Means,
Display pattern selection means for selecting the display pattern from the display pattern storage means based on the determination result by the winning determination means;
Command signal transmission means for transmitting the display pattern selected by the display pattern selection means to the peripheral control means as a command signal,
The peripheral control means includes
Image storage means for storing at least an image based on the plurality of types of display patterns as the image, a plurality of types of first effect images and a plurality of types of second effect images imitating the plurality of types of character information, respectively. ,
Display control means for controlling display on the display unit of an image based on the display pattern transmitted as the command signal;
Effect image display control means for controlling the display unit to display any one of the plurality of types of first effect images and the plurality of types of second effect images in addition to the image based on the display pattern. When,
Effect member driving means for driving and controlling the plurality of types of effect members to the appearance position and the standby position, respectively.
An effect executed before the first display mode is displayed after display control of the image based on the display pattern is started by the display control means, wherein the plurality of types of first effect images and the plurality of types Effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute a sequentially viewable effect that displays the plurality of types of character information in a predetermined order so as to be visible to the player using the effect members;
When it is determined by the effect execution determination means that the sequentially viewable effect is executed, it is determined which character information of the plurality of types of character information is sequentially displayed so as to be visible to the player. For each of the determined predetermined number of pieces of character information, an expression mode for expressing the first effect image imitating the character information, an expression mode for expressing an effect member imitating the character information, or the character An effect determining means for determining one of an expression mode for expressing both the first effect image imitating information and the effect member imitating the character information;
When it is determined by the effect execution determination means to execute the sequentially viewable effect, the effect image display control means and the effect member driving means are controlled, and the sequential viewing according to the determination result of the effect determination means. Production execution means for performing possible production;
Whether or not a special effect that can be visually recognized by a player by changing a part of the plurality of types of first effect images to the one of the plurality of types of second effect images in the sequentially viewable effect Special effect execution determination means for determining whether or not,
Special effect determining means for determining which of the plurality of types of second effect images is displayed so as to be visible to the player when the special effect execution determining means determines that the special effect can be executed. ,
Whether or not the character information of the first effect image included in the expression mode whose expression is determined by the effect determination unit and the second effect image whose expression is determined by the special effect determination unit match A match determination means for determining whether or not
The production execution means
When it is determined that the character information does not match by the match determination means, while performing the sequentially visible effect without executing the special effect,
When the match determination unit determines that the character information matches, the sequential viewable effect is executed, and included in the display mode in which the display is determined by the effect determination unit in the sequentially viewable effect The first effect image is displayed in a display manner in which the first effect image is changed to a second effect image that matches the character information.
According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, since the special effect may be executed only when the visually recognizable effect is sequentially executed, the opportunity for the effect to be executed is not increased. However, if the match determination means does not determine that the character information matches, the special effect will not be executed. Therefore, the ratio of the special effect being executed is less than the sequentially visible effect, and the special effect was executed. Sometimes a player's bliss can be improved. Therefore, the interest in sequentially visible effects and special effects is not lost, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.
Also, in the gaming machine according to claim 2, the effect executing means moves the plurality of types of character information, each of which has a unique superiority level, from the character information with the lower priority level to the higher character information. The player can perform the visually recognizable effects by making the player visually recognizable in the predetermined order, and obtain the superiority of the character information finally expressed according to the determination result of the effect determining means. The degree of expectation that becomes the specific display mode is notified in association with each other.
According to the gaming machine of claim 2, since the player information is displayed so as to be visible to the player in a predetermined order from the character information with the lower priority level toward the character information with the higher priority level, It is possible to easily recognize the expected degree of the specific display mode according to the superiority.
(Solution 1)
A display unit for displaying an image, a winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a profit to the player by the winning determination means In a gaming machine comprising: a profit granting state control means for controlling a profit granting state for giving a profit to a player after displaying a specific display mode on the display unit based on the determination to be made A component constituting the main body, an effect device that is attached to the component and that forms an effect region where an effect operation is performed on a part of the component as viewed from the player, and main game control of the gaming machine Main control means equipped with a microcomputer to perform, and peripheral control means equipped with a microcomputer for performing control based on a command signal transmitted from the main control means, The production device includes the display unit that displays the image from at least the production area toward the front side, and the main control unit includes the winning determination unit, the profit granting state control unit, Display pattern storage for storing a plurality of types of display patterns from when the display unit starts display control of the image and displaying the first display mode after a predetermined period of time until the determination result by the winning determination unit is displayed. And a display pattern selection unit that selects the display pattern from the display pattern storage unit based on a determination result by the winning determination unit, and the peripheral control using the display pattern selected by the display pattern selection unit as a command signal. Command signal transmitting means for transmitting to the means, and the peripheral control means includes the command signal transmitting means. Display control means for displaying the image based on the display pattern on the display unit based on the transmitted command signal, effect image storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect images, and the display unit An effect image display control means for displaying an effect image of a type, and after the display control means starts display control of the image based on the display pattern, the predetermined period until the first display mode is displayed elapses. An effect executing means that is an effect executed before and that executes an effect corresponding to the display pattern by the effect image display control means, wherein the effect executing means is a first effect comprising a plurality of types of effects. A first effect group executing means capable of executing one effect of the group, and a second effect group comprising a plurality of types of effects different from the first effect group, And a second effect group executing means that can be executed at a higher rate than the first effect group executing means than executing the first effect group, and can be executed regardless of whether or not the first effect group is executed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In this embodiment, the display unit is a liquid crystal display 116. The predetermined determination condition is whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, and the winning determination means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a big hit determination. This is a part for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on whether or not the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value by executing the process. The specific display mode is a jackpot symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), the profit granting state is a jackpot gaming state, and the profit granting state control means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. This is a part for executing the big hit game process (step S17) to control the big hit game state. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1.

  The constituent member is the game board 4, and the rendering device is the rendering device 40. Main game control of the gaming machine is processing such as special symbol processing, the microcomputer is the CPU 101a, and the main control means is the main control board 101. Control based on the command signal transmitted from the main control means is processing such as effect control processing, the microcomputer is the CPU 111a, and the peripheral control means is the peripheral board 110 (mainly the sub-integrated board 111).

  In addition, the first display mode is, for example, a state in which a predetermined number of symbols are stopped and displayed on any display line, and all symbols on the display line are not stopped and are not yet stopped. Is a reach mode in which the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display line by stopping at a predetermined symbol is a specific display mode. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a and the right decorative symbol 80c are In this state, the same symbol is stopped and displayed, and the medium decorative symbol 80b is still variably displayed. Note that the reach mode is not limited to that described above, and the mode immediately before the big hit may be the reach mode. The plurality of types of display patterns are variation display patterns with variation numbers 1 to 35, and the display pattern storage means is a ROM 101b mounted on the main control board 101. The display pattern selection means is a part for determining a variable display pattern according to the result of the big hit determination process in the variable display pattern setting process by the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. The command signal transmission means is a part that transmits the variable display pattern determined in the variable display pattern setting process to the sub-integrated substrate 111 in the information output process (step S16).

  Further, the display control means executes processing according to the variation display pattern by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the processing in the second information output processing (step S109). This is a part that transmits to the decoration control board 113 and performs display control of the variable display of the decoration symbols 80a to 80c in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electric decoration control board 113. The plural types of effect images are character images 70 to 75 and mini character images 90 to 93, and the effect image storage means is a ROM 113b mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. The effect image display control means is a function of the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 and controls display of the character images 70 to 75 and the mini character images 90 to 93 in the display area 42 based on the process data. Part. The effect execution means executes a notice selection process (step S103) according to the variation display pattern by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process as a sub information output process (step S103). In step S109), the signal is transmitted to the second illumination control board 113 and the waveform control board 114, and the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113 performs display control of a predetermined notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. Part.

  The first effect group is an advanced notice effect, an intense heat notice effect, and a lightning notice effect, and the first effect group execution means is an advanced notice selection of notice selection processing by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The process (step S112), the intense heat notice selection process (step S113), and the lightning notice notice selection process (step S114) are executed, and information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process is displayed in the sub information output process (step S109). This is a portion that transmits to the second electrical decoration control board 113 and controls display of a predetermined notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. The second effect group is an effect of outputting a mini character notice effect and a special sound, and the second effect group executing means is a mini character notice selection process (step S115) of the notice selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The sound change determination process (step S161) of the sound control process is executed, and information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process and the sound control process is output in the sub-information output process (step S109) and the second electrical decoration control board 113 and the waveform. The information is transmitted to the control board 114, and the CPU 113 a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 controls display of a predetermined notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116, and the ROM 114 b mounted on the waveform control board 114. Based on the stored predetermined sound data, a driving signal is output to the sound wave device 115 to output a sound. A minute.

  In this case, the display unit displays an image based on the display pattern, and the effect is executed before a predetermined period of time until the first display mode is displayed, and the effect corresponding to the display pattern is performed. Running. These effects are executed at a higher rate than the first effect group that can execute one effect among a plurality of effects, and whether or not the first effect group is executed. Regardless of the second production group that can be executed. In this way, in the first effect group having a high degree of importance for the player, it is possible to execute various effects of the first effect group by preparing a plurality of types of effects. In addition, even if one effect is not executed among a plurality of types of effects, there is a possibility that an effect other than the one effect may be executed, increasing the opportunity for the effects of the first effect group to be executed.

  In the second effect group that is less important to the player, the second effect group can be executed at a higher rate than the first effect group and can be executed regardless of whether or not the first effect group is executed. Thus, even if the effect of the first effect group is not executed, there is a high possibility that the second effect group will be executed, increasing the opportunity for the effect of the second effect group to be executed. Therefore, the interest in the effects of the first effect group and the second effect group is not lost, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 2)
The solving means 1 further comprises a sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound, the peripheral control means further comprises a sound output control means for outputting a sound output mode by the sound output means, and the effect executing means comprises: An effect corresponding to the display pattern is further executed by the sound output control means, and the first effect group executing means executes a first effect in which a first effect mode is displayed by the effect image display control means. Execution means and third effect execution means for executing a third effect in which a third effect mode different from the first effect mode is displayed by the effect image display control means, and the second effect group executing means includes: The fourth effect execution means for executing the fourth effect that displays the fourth effect mode different from the first effect mode and the third effect mode by the effect image display control means is different from the first sound output mode. First And a fifth effect executing means for executing a fifth effect that outputs the sound output mode by the sound output control means. The first effect executing means determines whether or not to execute the first effect. A first effect determining means, and a first effect determining means for determining which one of the first effect modes is to be displayed when the first effect execution determining means determines to execute the first effect; The third effect execution means determines whether or not to execute the third effect, and determines whether to execute the third effect by the third effect execution determination means and the third effect execution determination means. And a third effect determining means for determining which of the third effect modes is to be displayed, wherein the fourth effect executing means determines whether or not to execute the fourth effect. 4 effect execution determination means and the fourth effect execution determination And a fourth effect determining means for determining which of the fourth effect modes is to be displayed when it is determined that the fourth effect is to be executed according to a stage. Including sound change determination means for determining whether or not to change the sound output mode output by the output control means, wherein the first effect group execution means executes the first effect by the first effect determination execution means. When the determination is made, the first effect execution means displays the first effect mode determined by the first effect determination means by the effect image display control means, and the first effect execution means executes the first effect. When the determination to execute the first effect is not made by the effect determination execution means, and when the determination to execute the third effect is made by the third effect determination means, the third effect determination means The third effect is displayed by the third effect executing means, and the second effect group executing means is executed by the fourth effect determining execution means. When the determination is made to execute the fourth effect, the fourth effect is displayed by the effect image display control means in the fourth effect mode determined by the fourth effect determining means. And when the sound change determining means determines that the sound output mode is to be changed and the sound output control means is outputting the first sound output mode, the second sound is output. The fifth effect that the output mode is output by the sound output control means is executed by the fifth effect executing means.

  In the present embodiment, the sound output means is the sound wave device 115. The sound output control means outputs a signal instructing sound data to the waveform control board 114 by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and based on the sound data stored in the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114. This is a part that outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 to output a sound. The effect execution means executes a notice selection process (step S103) according to the variation display pattern by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process as a sub information output process (step S103). In step S109), the signal is transmitted to the second illumination control board 113 and the waveform control board 114, and the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113 performs display control of a predetermined notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. At the same time, it is a part that outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on predetermined sound data stored in the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114 to output sound.

  Further, the first effect form is the character images 70 to 74 displayed in the advanced notice effect, the first effect is the evolved notice effect, and the first effect executing means is mounted on the sub integrated board 111. The CPU 111a executes the advanced notice selection process (step S112) of the notice selection process, and transmits information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109). The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 is a part that controls the display of the advanced notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. The third effect mode is the dark image 83 displayed in the lightning notice effect, the lightning 87 and the spotlight 88 after the dark image 83 is displayed, and the third effect is the lightning notice effect, and the third effect is executed. The means executes the lightning notice selection process of the notice selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and outputs the information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process in the sub information output process (step S109). This is the part that transmits to the board 113 and controls the display of the lightning warning effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second lighting control board 113.

  Further, the fourth effect form is mini character images 90 to 93 displayed in the mini character notice effect, the fourth effect is the mini character notice effect, and the fourth effect executing means is mounted on the sub integrated board 111. The CPU 111a executes the mini character notice selection process (step S115) of the notice selection process and transmits information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process to the second electrical control board 113 by the sub information output process (step S109). This is a portion for controlling the display of the mini character notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the two-light control board 113. The first sound output mode is a daytime background normal sound or a night background normal sound, the second sound output mode is a special sound, the fifth effect is an effect of outputting a special sound, and a fifth effect execution means Performs a sound change determination process (step S161) of the sound control process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and performs waveform control of information according to the result of the sound control process in the sub-information output process (step S109). This is a portion that transmits to the substrate 114 and outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on the special sound data stored in the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control substrate 114 to output the special sound.

  Whether the first effect execution determination means is determined to be an advanced notice pattern other than the advanced notice pattern number 0 in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The first effect determining means is a development of any one of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is the part that determines the mold notice pattern.

  Further, the third effect execution determination means determines whether or not the lightning warning pattern other than the lightning warning pattern number 0 is determined in step S154 of the lightning warning notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The third effect determining means determines any lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 in step S154 of the lightning warning notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. Part.

  Whether or not the fourth effect execution determination means is determined to be a mini character notice pattern other than the mini character notice pattern number 0 in step S192 of the mini character notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. And the fourth effect determining means determines any of the mini character notice patterns of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 in step S192 of the mini character notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. It is a part to do. The sound change determination means is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and is a part for determining whether or not to change the sound output mode in the sound change determination process (step S161).

  Then, when it is determined that the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 is set, the advance notice pattern determined in step S117 of the notice selection process is set, and the second information output process (step S109) performs the second. The display is transmitted to the illumination control board 113, and the advanced notice effect is displayed and controlled in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113.

  Further, when it is determined to be the advanced warning pattern of the advanced warning pattern number 0, and when it is determined to be the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6, the lightning determined in step S122 of the warning selection process. A notice pattern is set, transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub-information output process (step S109), and lightning in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical control board 113. Display control of the notice effect.

  Further, when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 is determined, the mini character notice pattern determined in step S124 of the notice selection process is set, and the second electrical decoration control is performed in the sub information output process (step S109). It transmits to the board | substrate 113, and display control of the mini character notice effect is carried out in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by CPU113a mounted in the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113. FIG.

  Further, when it is determined in the sound change determination process (step S161) that the sound output mode is changed and the first normal sound or the second normal sound is output (the special sound output flag is reset), In step S184 of the sound change determination process, a special sound output flag is set, and in step S163 of the sound control process, a signal instructing the sound control data of the special sound is transmitted to the waveform control board 114 and mounted on the waveform control board 114. This is a portion for outputting a special sound by outputting a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on the special sound data stored in the ROM 114b.

  In this case, in the first effect group having a high degree of importance for the player, the first effect and the third effect are prepared as a plurality of types of effects, so that various effects of the first effect group can be executed. It becomes possible. In addition, even if the first effect is not executed among a plurality of types of effects, there is a possibility that a third effect different from the first effect may be executed, which increases the chances that the effects of the first effect group are executed. ing.

  Further, in the second effect group that is less important for the player, the fourth effect and the fifth effect are prepared as a plurality of types of effects different from the first effect group, so that various second effect groups can be obtained. It is possible to perform the production. In addition to displaying the effect image on the display unit (fourth effect), the sound output means outputs the sound (fifth effect), thereby providing the player with various effects. Never get bored of the player. Therefore, the interest in the effects of the first effect group and the second effect group is not lost, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 3)
In the solving means 2, the first effect group execution means displays the second effect mode different from the first effect mode, the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode by the effect image display control means. A second effect executing means for executing an effect is further provided. The second effect executing means includes a second effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the second effect and the second effect execution determining means. When it is determined to execute the second effect, the second effect determining means for determining which of the second effect modes is to be displayed, and the first effect mode determined by the first effect determining means. And the second effect mode determined by the second effect determining means, and match condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined match condition is satisfied, and executing the first effect group The means is the first production When the determination to execute the first effect is made by the fixed execution means, and the determination to execute the second effect is not made by the second effect determination means, the determination is made by the first effect determination means. The first effect is displayed by the effect image display control means by the first effect execution means, and the first effect determination execution means is determined to execute the first effect. And when the determination to execute the second effect is made by the second effect determining means, and when the predetermined match condition is satisfied by the match condition determining means, the first effect is determined. The first effect execution means displays the first effect mode determined by the effect determination means by the effect image display control means, and the first effect execution means executes the first effect. The second effect in which the second effect mode determined by the second effect determining unit is displayed by the effect image display control unit on a part or all of the first effect mode displayed at the output. 2 Performed by the effect execution means.

  In the present embodiment, the second effect mode is a white character image 76 or the like with a different color scheme of clothing displayed in the intense heat notice effect, the second effect is an intense heat notice effect, and the second effect execution means is Then, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111 executes the intense heat advance notice selection process (step S113) of the advance notice selection process, and the information corresponding to the result of the advance notice selection process is the second in the sub information output process (step S109). This is a part that transmits to the illumination control board 113 and controls the display of the intense heat announcement effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113.

  Whether the second effect execution determination means is determined to be a hot heat warning pattern other than the hot heat warning pattern number 0 in step S142 of the hot heat warning selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The second effect determining means determines whether or not one of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 in step S142 of the intense heat notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is the part that determines the thermal notice pattern. The predetermined matching conditions are the image display character to be executed in the selected advance notice pattern and the selected intense notice in the image display of a plurality of kinds of characters such as wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and Monster. Whether the image display character executed by the pattern matches or not is met, and the matching condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is set in step S119 of the notice selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is a part for determining whether or not it is established.

  Then, when it is determined to be the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 and when it is determined to be the intense notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 0, it is determined in step S117 of the notice selection process. The developed advance notice pattern is set, transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109), and the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. Control the display of the advanced notice effect.

  Further, when it is determined as the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 and when it is decided as the intense notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4, and the step of the notice selection process When the step of the advance notice pattern and the intense heat notice pattern match in S119, the advance notice pattern determined in Step S117 of the notice selection process is set, and the intense heat notice pattern is set in Step S120. In the sub information output process (step S109), the information is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and the advanced notice effect is executed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. At the same time, the intense heat announcement effect is displayed and controlled by a part or all of the advanced notice effect.

  In this case, in the first effect group, it is possible to execute various effects of the first effect group by providing the second effect as a plurality of types of effects. Moreover, since there is a possibility that the second effect is executed only when the first effect is executed among a plurality of types of effects, the opportunity to execute the effect of the first effect group is not increased. However, since the second effect is not executed unless a predetermined matching condition is established for the first effect and the second effect, the ratio of the second effect to be executed is compared with the first effect and the third effect. The bliss of the player can be improved when the second performance is executed. Therefore, the interest in the second effect in the first effect group is not lost, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 4)
A display unit for displaying an image, a winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a profit to the player by the winning determination means In a gaming machine comprising: a profit granting state control means for controlling a profit granting state for giving a profit to a player after displaying a specific display mode on the display unit based on the determination to be made A component constituting the main body, an effect device that is attached to the component and that forms an effect region where an effect operation is performed on a part of the component as viewed from the player, and main game control of the gaming machine Main control means equipped with a microcomputer to perform, and peripheral control means equipped with a microcomputer for performing control based on a command signal transmitted from the main control means, The production device includes the display unit that displays the image from at least the production area toward the front side, and the main control unit includes the winning determination unit, the profit granting state control unit, Display pattern storage for storing a plurality of types of display patterns from when the display unit starts display control of the image and displaying the first display mode after a predetermined period of time until the determination result by the winning determination unit is displayed. And a display pattern selection unit that selects the display pattern from the display pattern storage unit based on a determination result by the winning determination unit, and the peripheral control using the display pattern selected by the display pattern selection unit as a command signal. Command signal transmitting means for transmitting to the means, and the peripheral control means includes the command signal transmitting means. Display control means for displaying the image based on the display pattern on the display unit based on the transmitted command signal, effect image storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect images, and the display unit An effect image display control means for displaying an effect image of a type, and after the display control means starts display control of the image based on the display pattern, the predetermined period until the first display mode is displayed elapses. An effect execution unit that executes an effect according to the display pattern by the effect image display control unit, and the effect execution unit displays a first effect mode as the effect image display. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect displayed by the control means and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode are displayed in the effect image display system. Second effect executing means for executing the second effect displayed by the control means, and third effect for displaying the third effect mode different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode by the effect image display control means. Third effect execution means to be executed, wherein the first effect execution means determines whether to execute the first effect by the first effect execution determination means and the first effect execution determination means. And a first effect determining means for determining which of the first effect modes is to be displayed when it is determined that the first effect is to be executed, and the second effect executing means includes the second effect. Which of the second effect modes is displayed when the second effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute and when the second effect execution determining means determines to execute the second effect. The second effect determining means to determine, and the previous A match for determining whether or not a predetermined matching condition is satisfied between the first effect mode determined by the first effect determination unit and the second effect mode determined by the second effect determination unit. Condition determining means, wherein the third effect executing means performs the third effect by the third effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the third effect, and the third effect execution determining means. And a third effect determining means for determining which of the third effect modes is to be displayed when a determination is made to execute, wherein the effect executing means is the first effect determination executing means by the first effect determination executing means. The first effect mode determined by the first effect determining means when it is determined that the effect is to be executed and the second effect determining means is not determined to execute the second effect. The production image table The first effect displayed by the control means is executed by the first effect executing means, and when the first effect determination executing means determines to execute the first effect, the second effect determining means. When the determination to execute the second effect is made, and when the predetermined match condition is satisfied by the match condition determination means, the first effect mode determined by the first effect determination means The first effect that is displayed by the effect image display control means is executed by the first effect execution means, and the second effect is displayed in part or all of the first effect mode displayed in the first effect. The second effect execution means displays the second effect mode determined by the effect determination means by the effect image display control means, and the second effect execution means executes the first effect determination execution. When the determination to execute the first effect is not made by the means, and when the determination to execute the third effect is made by the third effect determination means, the determination is made by the third effect determination means. A gaming machine, wherein the third effect is displayed by the effect image display control means, and the third effect execution means executes the third effect.

  In this embodiment, the display unit is a liquid crystal display 116. The predetermined determination condition is whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, and the winning determination means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a big hit determination. This is a part for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on whether or not the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value by executing the process. The specific display mode is a jackpot symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), the profit granting state is a jackpot gaming state, and the profit granting state control means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. This is a part for executing the big hit game process (step S17) to control the big hit game state. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1.

  The constituent member is the game board 4, and the rendering device is the rendering device 40. Main game control of the gaming machine is processing such as special symbol processing, the microcomputer is the CPU 101a, and the main control means is the main control board 101. Control based on the command signal transmitted from the main control means is processing such as effect control processing, the microcomputer is the CPU 111a, and the peripheral control means is the peripheral board 110 (mainly the sub-integrated board 111).

  In addition, the first display mode is, for example, a state in which a predetermined number of symbols are stopped and displayed on any display line, and all symbols on the display line are not stopped and are not yet stopped. Is a reach mode in which the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display line by stopping at a predetermined symbol is a specific display mode. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a and the right decorative symbol 80c are In this state, the same symbol is stopped and displayed, and the medium decorative symbol 80b is still variably displayed. Note that the reach mode is not limited to that described above, and the mode immediately before the big hit may be the reach mode. The plurality of types of display patterns are variation display patterns with variation numbers 1 to 35, and the display pattern storage means is a ROM 101b mounted on the main control board 101. The display pattern selection means is a part for determining a variable display pattern according to the result of the big hit determination process in the variable display pattern setting process by the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. The command signal transmission means is a part that transmits the variable display pattern determined in the variable display pattern setting process to the sub-integrated substrate 111 in the information output process (step S16).

  Further, the display control means executes processing according to the variation display pattern by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the processing in the second information output processing (step S109). This is a part that transmits to the decoration control board 113 and performs display control of the variable display of the decoration symbols 80a to 80c in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electric decoration control board 113. The plural types of effect images are character images 70 to 75 and mini character images 90 to 93, and the effect image storage means is a ROM 113b mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. The effect image display control means is a function of the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 and controls display of the character images 70 to 75 and the mini character images 90 to 93 in the display area 42 based on the process data. Part. The effect execution means executes a notice selection process (step S103) according to the variation display pattern by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process as a sub information output process (step S103). This is a portion that is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in S109), and a predetermined notice effect is displayed and controlled in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  Further, the first effect form is the character images 70 to 74 displayed in the advanced notice effect, the first effect is the evolved notice effect, and the first effect executing means is mounted on the sub integrated board 111. The CPU 111a executes the advanced notice selection process (step S112) of the notice selection process, and transmits information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109). The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 is a part that controls the display of the advanced notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. The second effect is a white character image 76 or the like with a different color scheme of clothing displayed in the intense heat notice effect, the second effect is an intense heat notice effect, and the second effect execution means is the sub integrated board 111. The CPU 111a mounted on the CPU executes the intense heat notice selection process (step S113) of the notice selection process, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process in the sub information output process (step S109). The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs display control of the intense heat warning effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. The third effect mode is the dark image 83 displayed in the lightning notice effect, the lightning 87 and the spotlight 88 after the dark image 83 is displayed, and the third effect is the lightning notice effect, and the third effect is executed. The means executes the lightning notice selection process of the notice selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and outputs the information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process in the sub information output process (step S109). This is the part that transmits to the board 113 and controls the display of the lightning warning effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second lighting control board 113.

  Whether the first effect execution determination means is determined to be an advanced notice pattern other than the advanced notice pattern number 0 in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The first effect determining means is a development of any one of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is the part that determines the mold notice pattern.

  Whether the second effect execution determination means is determined to be a hot heat warning pattern other than the hot heat warning pattern number 0 in step S142 of the hot heat warning selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The second effect determining means determines whether or not one of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 in step S142 of the intense heat notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is the part that determines the thermal notice pattern. The predetermined matching conditions are the image display character to be executed in the selected advance notice pattern and the selected intense notice in the image display of a plurality of kinds of characters such as wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and Monster. Whether the image display character executed by the pattern matches or not is met, and the matching condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is set in step S119 of the notice selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is a part for determining whether or not it is established.

  Further, the third effect execution determination means determines whether or not the lightning warning pattern other than the lightning warning pattern number 0 is determined in step S154 of the lightning warning notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The third effect determining means determines any lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 in step S154 of the lightning warning notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. Part.

  Then, when it is determined to be the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 and when it is determined to be the intense notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 0, it is determined in step S117 of the notice selection process. The developed advance notice pattern is set, transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109), and the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. Control the display of the advanced notice effect.

  Further, when it is determined as the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 and when it is decided as the intense notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4, and the step of the notice selection process When the step of the advance notice pattern and the intense heat notice pattern match in S119, the advance notice pattern determined in Step S117 of the notice selection process is set, and the intense heat notice pattern is set in Step S120. In the sub information output process (step S109), the information is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and the advanced notice effect is executed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. At the same time, the intense heat announcement effect is displayed and controlled by a part or all of the advanced notice effect.

  Further, when it is determined to be the advanced warning pattern of the advanced warning pattern number 0, and when it is determined to be the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6, the lightning determined in step S122 of the warning selection process. A notice pattern is set, transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub-information output process (step S109), and lightning in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical control board 113. Display control of the notice effect.

  In this case, the display unit displays an image based on the display pattern, and the effect is executed before a predetermined period of time until the first display mode is displayed, and the effect corresponding to the display pattern is performed. Running. As these effects, a first effect, a second effect, and a third effect are prepared as a plurality of effects, so that various effects can be executed. In addition, even if the first effect is not executed among a plurality of types of effects, there is a possibility that a third effect different from the first effect may be executed, increasing the opportunity for the effect to be executed.

  Moreover, since there is a possibility that the second effect is executed only when the first effect is executed among a plurality of types of effects, the opportunity to execute the effect of the first effect group is not increased. However, since the second effect is not executed unless a predetermined matching condition is established for the first effect and the second effect, the ratio of the second effect to be executed is compared with the first effect and the third effect. The bliss of the player can be improved when the second performance is executed. Therefore, the interest in the effects of the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect is not lost, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 5)
A display unit for displaying an image, a winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a profit to the player by the winning determination means In a gaming machine comprising: a profit granting state control means for controlling a profit granting state for giving a profit to a player after displaying a specific display mode on the display unit based on the determination to be made A component that constitutes a main body, an effect device that is attached to the component and that forms an effect region where an effect operation is performed on a part of the component as viewed from the player, and a sound output that performs a predetermined sound output Means, a main control means equipped with a microcomputer for performing main game control of the gaming machine, and a microcomputer for performing control based on a command signal transmitted from the main control means. And the effect control device has the display unit for displaying the image from at least the effect area toward the front side, and the main control means is the winning determination means. And the profit granting state control means and the display unit start the display control of the image, display the first display mode after a predetermined period, and then display the determination result by the winning determination means Display pattern storage means for storing display patterns of types, display pattern selection means for selecting the display pattern from the display pattern storage means based on the determination result by the winning determination means, and selected by the display pattern selection means Command signal transmitting means for transmitting the display pattern as a command signal to the peripheral control means, and the peripheral control means Display control means for displaying the image based on the display pattern on the display unit based on the command signal transmitted by the command signal transmission means, effect image storage means for storing a plurality of types of effect images, Effect image display control means for displaying the plurality of kinds of effect images on the display unit, sound output control means for outputting a sound output mode on the sound output means, and the display control means based on the display pattern An effect executed after the image display control is started and before the predetermined period until the first display mode is displayed, and an effect corresponding to the display pattern is provided in the effect image display control means and Production execution means executed by the sound output control means, wherein the production execution means is a first production group consisting of a plurality of types of productions. A first effect group executing means capable of executing one effect and a second effect group consisting of a plurality of effects different from the first effect group, and the first effect group executing means Second effect group execution means that can be executed at a higher rate than the first effect group and that can be executed regardless of whether or not to execute the first effect group. The first effect group execution means includes: The first effect executing means for executing the first effect that displays the effect mode by the effect image display control means, and the second effect that displays the second effect mode different from the first effect mode by the effect image display control means. Second effect executing means for executing the third effect execution means for executing the third effect for displaying the third effect mode different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode by the effect image display control means; , Including the second production group Means for executing a fourth effect for displaying a fourth effect mode different from the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the third effect mode by the effect image display control unit; 5th effect execution means for executing a 5th effect which outputs the 2nd sound output mode different from the 1st sound output mode by the sound output control means, The 1st effect execution means includes the 1st effect Which of the first effect modes is displayed when the first effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute the first effect execution determining means determines that the first effect is to be executed. First effect determining means for determining the second effect execution means, wherein the second effect executing means is a second effect execution determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect, and the second effect execution determining means. No determination to execute the second effect Determined by the second effect determining means for determining which of the second effect modes is to be displayed, the first effect mode determined by the first effect determining means, and the second effect determining means. Whether or not the third effect executing means executes the third effect, and a match condition determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined match condition is satisfied. The third effect execution determining means for determining whether or not the third effect execution determining means determines whether to display the third effect mode when the third effect execution determining means determines to execute the third effect. 3rd effect determination means, wherein the 4th effect execution means determines whether or not to execute the 4th effect, and the 4th effect execution determination means and the fourth effect execution determination means determine the fourth effect. When the determination to execute is made, Fourth effect determining means for determining which of the four effect modes is to be displayed, wherein the fifth effect executing means determines whether or not to change the sound output mode output by the sound output control means. Sound change determination means for performing the first effect group execution means when the first effect determination execution means determines to execute the first effect, and the second effect determination means determines the first effect group execution means. When the determination to execute two effects is not made, the first effect execution means displays the first effect that the first effect mode determined by the first effect determination means is displayed by the effect image display control means. And when the determination to execute the first effect is made by the first effect determination execution means, and when the determination to execute the second effect is made by the second effect determination means, and When the predetermined matching condition is satisfied by the matching condition determining means, the first effect that the first effect mode determined by the first effect determining means is displayed by the effect image display control means is the first effect. The second effect mode determined by the second effect determining unit is displayed on the effect image display as a part or all of the first effect mode displayed by the first effect executing unit. The second effect displayed by the control means is executed by the second effect execution means, and the first effect determination execution means is not judged to execute the first effect, and the third effect determination. When the determination to execute the third effect is made by the means, the third effect mode determined by the third effect determining means is displayed by the effect image display control means. The third effect is executed by the third effect execution means, and the second effect group execution means is determined to execute the fourth effect by the fourth effect determination execution means. Determination that the fourth effect display unit displays the fourth effect mode determined by the determination unit is executed by the fourth effect execution unit, and the sound change determination unit changes the sound output mode. When the first sound output mode is output by the sound output control means, the fifth effect of outputting the second sound output mode by the sound output control means is A gaming machine that is executed by an effect execution means.

  In this embodiment, the display unit is a liquid crystal display 116. The predetermined determination condition is whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, and the winning determination means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and is a big hit determination. This is a part for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on whether or not the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value by executing the process. The specific display mode is a jackpot symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), the profit granting state is a jackpot gaming state, and the profit granting state control means is a function of the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. This is a part for executing the big hit game process (step S17) to control the big hit game state. The gaming machine is a pachinko machine 1.

  The component is the game board 4, the effect device is the effect device 40, and the sound output means is the sound wave device 115. Main game control of the gaming machine is processing such as special symbol processing, the microcomputer is the CPU 101a, and the main control means is the main control board 101. Control based on the command signal transmitted from the main control means is processing such as effect control processing, the microcomputer is the CPU 111a, and the peripheral control means is the peripheral board 110 (mainly the sub-integrated board 111).

  In addition, the first display mode is, for example, a state in which a predetermined number of symbols are stopped and displayed on any display line, and all symbols on the display line are not stopped and are not yet stopped. Is a reach mode in which the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display line by stopping at a predetermined symbol is a specific display mode. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a and the right decorative symbol 80c are In this state, the same symbol is stopped and displayed, and the medium decorative symbol 80b is still variably displayed. Note that the reach mode is not limited to that described above, and the mode immediately before the big hit may be the reach mode. The plurality of types of display patterns are variation display patterns with variation numbers 1 to 35, and the display pattern storage means is a ROM 101b mounted on the main control board 101. The display pattern selection means is a part for determining a variable display pattern according to the result of the big hit determination process in the variable display pattern setting process by the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. The command signal transmission means is a part that transmits the variable display pattern determined in the variable display pattern setting process to the sub-integrated substrate 111 in the information output process (step S16).

  Further, the display control means executes processing according to the variation display pattern by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the processing in the second information output processing (step S109). This is a part that transmits to the decoration control board 113 and performs display control of the variable display of the decoration symbols 80a to 80c in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electric decoration control board 113. The plural types of effect images are character images 70 to 75 and mini character images 90 to 93, and the effect image storage means is a ROM 113b mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. The effect image display control means is a function of the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 and controls display of the character images 70 to 75 and the mini character images 90 to 93 in the display area 42 based on the process data. Part. The sound output control means outputs a signal instructing sound data to the waveform control board 114 by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and based on the sound data stored in the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114. This is a part that outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 to output a sound. The effect execution means executes a notice selection process (step S103) according to the variation display pattern by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process as a sub information output process (step S103). In step S109), the signal is transmitted to the second illumination control board 113 and the waveform control board 114, and the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113 performs display control of a predetermined notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. At the same time, it is a part that outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on predetermined sound data stored in the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114 to output sound.

  The first effect group is an advanced notice effect, an intense heat notice effect, and a lightning notice effect, and the first effect group execution means is an advanced notice selection of notice selection processing by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The process (step S112), the intense heat notice selection process (step S113), and the lightning notice notice selection process (step S114) are executed, and information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process is displayed in the sub information output process (step S109). This is a portion that transmits to the second electrical decoration control board 113 and controls display of a predetermined notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. The second effect group is an effect of outputting a mini character notice effect and a special sound, and the second effect group executing means is a mini character notice selection process (step S115) of the notice selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The sound change determination process (step S161) of the sound control process is executed, and information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process and the sound control process is output in the sub-information output process (step S109) and the second electrical decoration control board 113 and the waveform. The information is transmitted to the control board 114, and the CPU 113 a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 controls display of a predetermined notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116, and the ROM 114 b mounted on the waveform control board 114. Based on the stored predetermined sound data, a driving signal is output to the sound wave device 115 to output a sound. A minute.

  Further, the first effect form is the character images 70 to 74 displayed in the advanced notice effect, the first effect is the evolved notice effect, and the first effect executing means is mounted on the sub integrated board 111. The CPU 111a executes the advanced notice selection process (step S112) of the notice selection process, and transmits information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109). The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 is a part that controls the display of the advanced notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. The second effect is a white character image 76 or the like with a different color scheme of clothing displayed in the intense heat notice effect, the second effect is an intense heat notice effect, and the second effect execution means is the sub integrated board 111. The CPU 111a mounted on the CPU executes the intense heat notice selection process (step S113) of the notice selection process, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process in the sub information output process (step S109). The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs display control of the intense heat warning effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. The third effect mode is the dark image 83 displayed in the lightning notice effect, the lightning 87 and the spotlight 88 after the dark image 83 is displayed, and the third effect is the lightning notice effect, and the third effect is executed. The means executes the lightning notice selection process of the notice selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and outputs the information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process in the sub information output process (step S109). This is the part that transmits to the board 113 and controls the display of the lightning warning effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second lighting control board 113.

  Further, the fourth effect form is mini character images 90 to 93 displayed in the mini character notice effect, the fourth effect is the mini character notice effect, and the fourth effect executing means is mounted on the sub integrated board 111. The CPU 111a executes the mini character notice selection process (step S115) of the notice selection process and transmits information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process to the second electrical control board 113 by the sub information output process (step S109). This is a portion for controlling the display of the mini character notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the two-light control board 113. The first sound output mode is a daytime background normal sound or a night background normal sound, the second sound output mode is a special sound, the fifth effect is an effect of outputting a special sound, and a fifth effect execution means Performs a sound change determination process (step S161) of the sound control process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and performs waveform control of information according to the result of the sound control process in the sub-information output process (step S109). This is a portion that transmits to the substrate 114 and outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on the special sound data stored in the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control substrate 114 to output the special sound.

  Whether the first effect execution determination means is determined to be an advanced notice pattern other than the advanced notice pattern number 0 in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The first effect determining means is a development of any one of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is the part that determines the mold notice pattern.

  Whether the second effect execution determination means is determined to be a hot heat warning pattern other than the hot heat warning pattern number 0 in step S142 of the hot heat warning selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The second effect determining means determines whether or not one of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 in step S142 of the intense heat notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is the part that determines the thermal notice pattern. The predetermined matching conditions are the image display character to be executed in the selected advance notice pattern and the selected intense notice in the image display of a plurality of kinds of characters such as wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and Monster. Whether the image display character executed by the pattern matches or not is met, and the matching condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is set in step S119 of the notice selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is a part for determining whether or not it is established.

  Further, the third effect execution determination means determines whether or not the lightning warning pattern other than the lightning warning pattern number 0 is determined in step S154 of the lightning warning notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The third effect determining means determines any lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 in step S154 of the lightning warning notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. Part.

  Whether or not the fourth effect execution determination means is determined to be a mini character notice pattern other than the mini character notice pattern number 0 in step S192 of the mini character notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. And the fourth effect determining means determines any of the mini character notice patterns of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 in step S192 of the mini character notice selection process executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. It is a part to do. The sound change determination means is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and is a part for determining whether or not to change the sound output mode in the sound change determination process (step S161).

  Then, when it is determined to be the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 and when it is determined to be the intense notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 0, it is determined in step S117 of the notice selection process. The developed advance notice pattern is set, transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109), and the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. Control the display of the advanced notice effect.

  Further, when it is determined as the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 and when it is decided as the intense notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4, and the step of the notice selection process When the step of the advance notice pattern and the intense heat notice pattern match in S119, the advance notice pattern determined in Step S117 of the notice selection process is set, and the intense heat notice pattern is set in Step S120. In the sub information output process (step S109), the information is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and the advanced notice effect is executed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. At the same time, the intense heat announcement effect is displayed and controlled by a part or all of the advanced notice effect.

  Further, when it is determined to be the advanced warning pattern of the advanced warning pattern number 0, and when it is determined to be the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6, the lightning determined in step S122 of the warning selection process. A notice pattern is set, transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub-information output process (step S109), and lightning in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical control board 113. Display control of the notice effect.

  Further, when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 is determined, the mini character notice pattern determined in step S124 of the notice selection process is set, and the second electrical decoration control is performed in the sub information output process (step S109). It transmits to the board | substrate 113, and display control of the mini character notice effect is carried out in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by CPU113a mounted in the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113. FIG.

  Further, when it is determined in the sound change determination process (step S161) that the sound output mode is changed and the first normal sound or the second normal sound is output (the special sound output flag is reset), In step S184 of the sound change determination process, a special sound output flag is set, and in step S163 of the sound control process, a signal instructing the sound control data of the special sound is transmitted to the waveform control board 114 and mounted on the waveform control board 114. This is a portion for outputting a special sound by outputting a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on the special sound data stored in the ROM 114b.

  In this case, the display unit displays an image based on the display pattern, and the effect is executed before a predetermined period of time until the first display mode is displayed, and the effect corresponding to the display pattern is performed. Running. These effects are executed at a higher rate than the first effect group that can execute one effect among a plurality of effects, and whether or not the first effect group is executed. Regardless of the second production group that can be executed. Thus, in the 1st production group with high importance for a player, the 1st production, the 2nd production, and the 3rd production are prepared as a plurality of kinds of productions, and various production of the 1st production group. Can be executed. In addition, even if the first effect is not executed among a plurality of types of effects, there is a possibility that the third effect is executed, which increases the chances that the effects of the first effect group are executed.

  Moreover, since there is a possibility that the second effect is executed only when the first effect is executed among a plurality of types of effects, the opportunity to execute the effect of the first effect group is not increased. However, since the second effect is not executed unless a predetermined matching condition is established for the first effect and the second effect, the ratio of the second effect to be executed is compared with the first effect and the third effect. The bliss of the player can be improved when the second performance is executed.

  Further, in the second effect group that is less important for the player, the fourth effect and the fifth effect are prepared as a plurality of types of effects different from the first effect group, so that various second effect groups can be obtained. It is possible to perform the production. In addition to displaying the effect image on the display unit (fourth effect), the sound output means outputs the sound (fifth effect), thereby providing the player with various effects. Never get bored of the player. Therefore, the interest in the effects of the first effect group and the second effect group is not lost, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 6)
In any one of Solution 1 to Solution 5, the first display mode includes a normal mode and a reach mode that is different from the normal mode and is displayed rarely than the normal mode.

  In the present embodiment, the normal mode is a mode in which the left decorative symbol 80a and the right decorative symbol 80c are stopped and displayed in different symbols, and the reach mode includes the left decorative symbol 80a and the right decorative symbol 80c. This is a mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In this case, since the first effect to the fifth effect are executed before the reach mode is displayed by the display control means, the first effect to the fifth effect are executed even when the normal mode is set as the first display mode. As a result, the player's sense of expectation for the state of profit provision can be improved. Since the first effect to the fifth effect can be executed before the normal mode is displayed by the display control means, the determination result by the winning determination means is displayed after the display control of the image is started by the display unit. The first effect to the fifth effect can be executed without increasing the period until the operation rate of the gaming machine is reduced.

(Solution 7)
In any one of the solving means 1 to 6, the peripheral control means includes a random number updating means for updating a random number within a predetermined numerical range within an information amount of 1 byte, and a random number updated by the random number updating means. Update random number storage means for storing, the first effect execution determination means, the second effect execution determination means, the third effect execution determination means, the fourth effect execution means, and the fifth effect execution means. The first effect, the second effect, the third effect, the fourth effect, and the fifth effect depending on whether or not the random numbers stored by the updated random number storage means each match a predetermined range of determination values. Determine whether to execute each.

  In the present embodiment, the random number update means is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and includes a warning pattern random number (an advanced warning pattern random number, an intense heat warning pattern random number, a lightning warning pattern random number, a mini character warning pattern random number). , Sound determination random number) is updated within a 256 numerical range within the 1-byte execution area. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 receives the variable display pattern command, the update random number storage means acquires the notice pattern random number and stores the notice pattern random number in the RAM 111c mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. is there. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute each effect depending on whether or not the notice pattern random number stored in the RAM 111c matches the determination value assigned to each notice pattern (for example, the intense heat notice effect). For example, in step S124 of the intense heat notice selection process, the intense heat notice patterns Nos. 1 to 4 are determined.

  In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute each of the first effect to the fifth effect depending on whether or not the random numbers stored in the updated random number storage unit match the determination values in a predetermined range. In the random number updating means, the possible ratio of the information amount of 1 byte is 1/256, and the execution determination probability (determining each effect in the first to fifth effect execution determining means and the first to fifth effect determining means, The ratio to be determined) can be set only in increments of 1/256. Therefore, if each effect is determined and all the determined effects are executed, a fine execution determination probability cannot be set. A plurality of types of effects such as the second effect is not executed unless a predetermined matching condition is established for the first effect and the second effect, or the third effect is executed when the first effect is not executed. Can be executed in combination with a predetermined method to set a fine execution determination probability and to produce a certain degree of randomness for the execution of the production.

  In addition, such a fine execution determination probability can be realized by increasing the amount of information for updating the random number. However, by executing a combination of a plurality of types of effects by a predetermined method, the amount of information can be reduced to 1 byte. Although it is realized, it is possible to reduce the amount of information necessary for updating the random number by the random number updating means.

(Solution 8)
In any one of the solving means 1 to the solving means 7, the effect device is attached to the component member from the front side thereof, the front unit forming the effect region, and the component member from the rear side thereof. And a rear unit having an operation mechanism capable of performing a staging operation within the staging area, and the display unit is attached to the rear unit from behind.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the rear unit is located behind the front unit, and the rear unit is configured to be attached from the back side of the constituent members. It has become a thing. The components of the gaming machine main body include a game board, a frame, a housing, etc., but anyway a stunning operation (for example, movement by some mechanical mechanism, rotation / action of a movable body, light emission operation, etc.) ) Is provided in the rear unit, the player is unaware of the existence of the operation mechanism and cannot predict what stage operation will be performed.

  On the other hand, when the production operation is performed by the operation mechanism in such a state, the player can enjoy the game while being excited and touched by the unexpected production operation.

  The advantages of the gaming machine of the present invention can also affect other directions. That is, since the equipment related to the production has a structure in which the front unit and the rear unit are separated, one of them can be repaired and replaced independently, or can be used for maintenance and inspection. In particular, since the maintainability of the rear unit having the operation mechanism is enhanced, it is easy to deal with machine troubles, and the operation and operation of the gaming machine can be performed efficiently.

(Solution 9)
In the solving means 8, the rear unit constitutes the operation mechanism, and an appearance position that appears visibly on the front side facing the player so as to perform the staging operation, and retreating from the appearance position. The reciprocating operation is possible between a standby position that is not visible from the front side, and a plurality of types of effect members imitating the first effect mode, and the operation mechanism together with the effect members, A drive source that reciprocates the effect operating body; and a standby accommodating portion that accommodates the drive source together with the effect member and holds the effect member in the standby position in the accommodated state.

  In this case, the rear unit can perform the rendering operation by reciprocating the rendering member (movable body, character doll, etc.). The effect member does not touch the eyes at the standby position, but when it appears at the appearance position, it exerts presence on the front side. The rear unit can accommodate all the components (mechanical mechanism, drive source, etc.) necessary for the operation of such an effect member, and also accommodates the effect member in this state.

(Solution 10)
In the solving means 9, the peripheral control means further includes an effect member driving means capable of driving and controlling the reciprocating motion of the effect operating body by the drive source, and the effect executing means provides the effect according to the display pattern. The first effect executing means further executes the first effect that the first effect executing means expresses the first effect mode in a predetermined order so as to be visible to the player, and the effect image display control means and The first effect determining means is executed by the effect member driving means, and when the first effect execution determining means determines to execute the first effect, any of the first effect modes is played. In addition to deciding whether to be visible to the user, an effect image that imitates the first effect aspect and / or an effect member that imitates the first effect aspect is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the production member driving means outputs the drive signals of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 to the first electric decoration control board 112 by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and performs the first electric decoration control. This is a portion that outputs a drive signal to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 when the drive signal is input a predetermined number of times on the substrate 112. The predetermined order is the order of wolf man → Dracula → Franken → Monster-kun. The function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 is based on the advanced notice pattern random number and the judgment value set in the evolved notice table in steps S131 to S134 of the advanced notice selection process ( In this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the advanced notice effect (based on whether or not the judgment value assigned to the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 matches the advanced notice pattern random number). The development stage and the production mode (in this embodiment, the advanced notice pattern) based on the evolved notice pattern random number and the determination value set in the evolved notice table in steps S131 to S134 of the advanced notice selection process. To decide.

  In this case, when it is determined by the first effect execution determination means that the first effect is executed, it is determined which one of the first effect modes is visible to the player, and the first effect mode is determined. Since the effect member imitating the first effect aspect is determined, and the effect member imitating the first effect aspect is also displayed in addition to the effect image imitating the first effect aspect. It is possible to make the production members pay attention to the production.

(Solution 11)
In the solving means 10, the first effect executing means includes effect condition establishment determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and the first effect determining means is the effect condition establishment determination. First effect selection determining means for selecting any one of the effect image and the effect member at a different ratio according to the determination result by the means, wherein the first effect selection determining means is the first effect execution determining means. When the determination to execute the first effect is made by selecting one of the effect image and the effect member in each of the first effect modes determined by the first effect determining means. An effect mode that is visible to a person is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the production condition establishment determination means is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and is a part that determines whether or not the daytime background flag is ON in step S131 of the advanced notice selection process. is there. The effect selection determining means is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and includes the advanced notice pattern random number and the judgment value set in the advanced notice table in steps S131 to S134 of the advanced notice selection process. This is a part for determining the production mode (in this embodiment, the advanced notice pattern).

  In this case, one of the effect image and the effect member is selected in each of the first effect modes determined by the first effect determining means when the first effect execution determining means determines to execute the first effect. Thus, the first effect mode that is visible to the player is determined, and one of the effect image and the effect member corresponding to the one effect mode is displayed, so both the effect image and the effect member It is possible to focus attention on the effect image or effect member that is expressed rather than being expressed.

(Solution 12)
In the solving means 11, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of first effect determination tables in which a first determination value within a predetermined range is set, and the first effect execution determination means and the first effect determination means include: It is determined whether to execute the first effect using the first effect determination table corresponding to the display pattern and the determination result by the effect condition establishment determination means among the plurality of types of first effect determination tables. And determining which of the first effect modes is visible to the player, and providing an effect image imitating the first effect mode and / or an effect member imitating the first effect mode. decide.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect determination table is a daytime background advance notice table provided in accordance with a variable display pattern and a background image (day background image 81, night background image 82). This is an advanced notice table.

  In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the first effect using the first effect determination table according to the display pattern and the determination result of the effect condition establishment determination means, and any of the first effect modes is a game. In order to determine whether or not to be visually recognized by a person and to determine an effect image imitating the first effect aspect and / or an effect member imitating the first effect aspect, In accordance with the determination result), it is determined whether or not the first effect is to be executed, and which of the first effect modes is determined to be visible to the player, and the first effect mode It is possible to determine an effect member that imitates the effect image and / or effect member that imitates the first effect mode.

(Solution means 13)
In the solution unit 11 or the solution unit 12, the first effect selection determining unit determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the effect condition establishment determining unit determines that the effect condition is satisfied. More often than not, the frequency of selecting the effect member was increased.

  In the present embodiment, the night background development type advance notice table is configured so that more judgment values are assigned to the developed type advance notice pattern that causes the character body to appear than the day background advance type notice table.

  In this case, when the production condition is satisfied, the frequency at which the production member is expressed is higher than when the production condition is not established, and thus it is possible to increase the frequency at which the production member is expressed in the first production. It becomes.

(Solution 14)
In any one of the solving means 11 to 13, the first effect selection determining means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the effect condition establishment determining means determines that the effect condition is satisfied. The effect image is determined at a lower rate than when determined, and is determined as the effect member at a higher rate.

  In this embodiment, the night background development type advance notice table is configured so that a smaller judgment value is assigned to the developed type advance notice pattern that displays the character image than the day background advance type advance notice table, and the character body appears. A lot of judgment values are assigned to the mold notice pattern.

  In this case, when the production condition is established, the production image is determined at a lower rate than when the production condition is not established and the production member is decided at a higher rate. The frequency of being issued can be increased.

(Solution 15)
In any one of the solving means 11 to 14, the first effect execution determining means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the effect condition establishment determining means determines that the effect condition is satisfied. It is determined that the first effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is determined.

  In this embodiment, the night background development type advance notice table is configured such that more judgment values are assigned to the advanced type advance notice pattern number 1 to the advanced type advance notice pattern number 16 than the day background developed type advance notice table.

  In this case, when the production condition is satisfied, the ratio of determining that the first production execution is performed by the first production execution determination unit is higher than when the production condition is not established. Can be increased, and the frequency at which the effect member is exposed in the first effect can be increased.

(Solution 16)
In any one of the solving means 11 to 15, the first effect selection determining means determines that the player should be provided with a profit when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player. The effect member is determined at a higher rate than when no change was made.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation display pattern that is a big hit, the night background development type advance notice is assigned so that more judgment values are assigned to the development type notice pattern that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear than the variation display pattern that is a loss. It consists of a table and an advanced notice table for daytime background.

  In this case, when a decision is made to give a profit to the player, the production member is determined at a higher rate than when the decision to give a profit is not made. The expectation with respect to the player's profit granting state can be increased.

(Solution 17)
In any one of the solution means 2 to the solution means 16, the first effect determination means makes a determination to give a profit to the player when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means. More first production modes than when not made are determined as production modes that are visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation display pattern that is a big hit, the advanced notification table for the day background and the development type for the night background are assigned so that more judgment values are allocated to the advanced notification pattern that has more stages than the variation display pattern that is out of place. The notice table is configured.

  In this case, when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means, the player can visually recognize more first effect modes than when the determination to give the profit to the player is not made. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the state of profit provision when more first effects are expressed.

(Solution 18)
In any one of the solving means 2 to the solving means 17, the first effect mode is an effect mode in which a predetermined order can be recognized by visual recognition.

  In the present embodiment, a player who has knowledge about a strange novel in which a monster, Franken, Dracula, and a wolf man appear can recognize the order of monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf Man.

  In this case, the player can recognize the order determined in advance by visually recognizing the first effect mode because the player can recognize the order determined in advance by visual recognition.

(Solution 19)
In the solving means 18, the first effect determining means determines the first effect mode from the lowest first effect mode to the first effect mode of the predetermined order as an effect mode that is visible to the player. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the first rendering mode with the lowest ranking is a wolf man.

  In this case, the first effect mode from the first effect mode having the lowest order to the predetermined order is determined as an effect mode that is visible to the player, and is displayed to the player in order from the lowest order. Therefore, the number of first effect modes that are visible in the first effect can be easily recognized according to the order of the displayed effect modes.

(Solution 20)
In the solving means 19, the first effect determining means is the first effect mode having the lower ranking as the first effect mode of the predetermined order when the winning judgment means judges that the player should be given a profit. Is determined to be an effect image corresponding to the first effect mode having the next lowest rank after the first effect mode.

  In this embodiment, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit, the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 8 (step 1, step 2, and step 3 ′ is set in the developed notice table for daytime background). When the character body 150 imitating Franken is made to appear, and the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 8 (in the daytime background developed notice table is used regardless of the determination result of the jackpot determination process) Step 1, Step 2, and Step 3 ′ are executed sequentially) and the ratio (about 66% (94/143 × 100)) when the character body 150 imitating Franken appears is used for the jackpot determination process. The advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 11 (step 1, step) Step 2, Step 3, and Step 4 are executed sequentially), and when the character image simulating a monster is displayed after controlling the character image simulating Franken, regardless of the determination result of the jackpot determination process In the development background notice table for daytime background, the development type advance notice pattern of the advance type advance notice pattern number 11 is determined (step 1, step 2, step 3, and step 4 are executed sequentially) and display control of the character image imitating Franken is performed. The ratio (about 68% (170/251 × 100)) when the character image imitating the monster later is displayed and controlled is substantially the same.

  In this case, when it is determined by the winning determination means that a profit should be given to the player, the ratio is determined to be approximately the same as the ratio determined as the effect member corresponding to the first effect mode having a lower rank as the first effect mode of the predetermined order Thus, in order to determine the effect image corresponding to the first effect mode with the next lowest order after the first effect mode, even when the effect member is displayed even in the first effect mode with the lower rank, The expectation with respect to a profit grant state can be raised.

(Solution 21)
In any one of the solution means 18 to the solution means 20, the first effect execution means controls the effect image display control means and / or the effect member driving means to produce an effect corresponding to the first effect mode having a lower order. After displaying the image and / or effect member, in the state where the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the first effect mode is displayed, the first effect mode having the next lowest order after the first effect mode is displayed. The corresponding effect image and / or effect member is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the character image and / or character body in the next stage is displayed with the character image and / or character body continuously displayed.

  In this case, after the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the first effect mode having a low order is displayed, the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the first effect mode is displayed. Since the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the first effect mode having the second lowest rank is displayed after the one effect mode, the number of modes expressed in the first effect can be specified.

(Solution means 22)
In any one of the solution means 18 to the solution means 20, the first effect execution means controls the effect image display control means and / or the effect member driving means to produce an effect corresponding to the first effect mode having a lower order. After the image and / or effect member is displayed, the effect image and / or effect member to be displayed is switched to the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the first effect mode having the next lower rank than the first effect mode. To express.

  In this embodiment, the character image and / or character body is switched and displayed for each stage.

  In this case, after displaying the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the first effect mode having the lower rank, the effect image and / or effect corresponding to the first effect mode having the next lower rank after the first effect mode. Since the display is switched to the member, attention can be paid to the effect mode to be expressed later.

(Solution 23)
In any one of the solving means 18 to the solving means 20, the first effect executing means controls the effect image display control means and / or the effect member driving means according to the first effect mode having the lowest order. After expressing the effect image and / or effect member, in the state where one of the effect image and the effect member corresponding to the first effect mode is displayed, the first effect of the next lowest order after the first effect mode. An effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the aspect is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the character image or character body in the next stage is displayed in a state where one of the character image and / or character body is continuously displayed.

  In this case, after expressing the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the first effect mode having a lower rank, in a state where one of the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the first effect mode is expressed. In order to display the effect image and / or effect member corresponding to the first effect mode having the next lowest order after the first effect mode, the number of the first effect modes expressed in the first effect can be specified. At the same time, since the number of presentation modes to be displayed can be reduced, attention can be paid to the presentation modes to be expressed later.

(Solution 24)
In any one of the solving means 10 to 23, the effect member driving means drives and controls the effect member so as to cover a part of the display unit in front of the display unit as the appearance position.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A ') to 58 (D'), it appears on the front side of the display area 42.

  In this case, since the effect member is driven and driven to an appearance position that covers a part of the display unit in front of the display unit, the drive state of the effect member can be easily recognized, and the effect is more than the display state of the display unit. It is possible to focus attention on the driving state of the member, and to improve the player's sense of expectation for the profit-giving state.

(Solution 25)
In any one of the solving means 9 to 24, the effect member corresponding to one of the first effect modes is displayed on the display unit by the effect image display control means corresponding to the one. Also imitated with large dimensions.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the character bodies 150 and 152 corresponding to the character image are displayed rather than the display-controlled dimensions of the character image 71 to the character image 73 that are display-controlled in FIGS. 56 (B) to 56 (D). 154 is imitated with large dimensions.

  In this case, since the effect member is imitated with a size larger than the size of the effect image displayed on the display unit, the drive state of the effect member can be easily recognized, and the effect member drive state is more focused than the display state of the effect image. It is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the profit-giving state.

(Solution 26)
In any one of the solving means 3 to 25, the matching condition determining means is a first effect mode displayed by the effect image display control means among the first effect modes determined by the first effect determining means. And whether or not the predetermined matching condition is satisfied with the second effect mode determined by the second effect determining means.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined matching condition is that an image display character (effect member) to be executed with the selected advance notice pattern among a plurality of types of image display of a wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and Monster. Is not included) and whether the image display character executed with the selected intense heat warning pattern matches.

  In this case, the first effect mode displayed by the effect image display control unit and the second effect mode determined by the second effect determination unit among the first effect modes determined by the first effect determination unit are set in advance. By determining whether or not the predetermined match condition is satisfied, even if it is determined that the second effect is executed by the second effect execution determination means, the match condition predetermined by the match condition determination means is satisfied. Otherwise, the second effect is not executed, and the second effect mode is not displayed regularly (periodically). Therefore, the second effect mode is displayed accidentally, so that the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed as much as possible.

(Solution means 27)
In any one of the solution means 3 to the solution means 26, the second effect execution determination means is the second effect at a rate lower than the rate at which the first effect execution determination means determines to execute the first effect. Is determined to execute.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of the total number of judgment values assigned to the intense heat warning pattern Nos. 1 to 4 to the total number of judgment values assigned to all the intense heat warning patterns is the total advance notice. The advanced notice table and the intense heat notice table so as to be higher than the ratio of the total number of judgment values assigned to the developed advance notice patterns Nos. 1 to 16 to the total number of judgment values assigned to the patterns. By allocating the judgment value at, the ratio of selecting the intense heat warning pattern Nos. 1 to 4 is set lower than the ratio of selecting the advanced warning pattern Nos. 1 to 16. ing.

  In this case, it is determined that the second effect is to be executed at a rate lower than the rate at which the first effect is determined by the first effect determining means, so that the second effect is higher than the determination rate at which the first effect is executed. The determination ratio for executing the effect can be lowered, and the second effect is executed only when a predetermined matching condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the second effect executed rarely than the first effect is realized. be able to.

(Solution 28)
In any one of the solving means 3 to the solving means 27, the second effect execution judging means provides the player with a benefit by the winning judgment means when the winning judgment means judges that a profit should be given to the player. It is determined that the second effect is executed at a higher rate than when the determination to give is not made.

  In the present embodiment, the variation display pattern in which the determination result is farther than the variation display pattern in which the determination result is a big hit is the intense heat notification pattern numbers 1 to 1 for the total number of determination values assigned to all the intense heat notification patterns. When a variation display pattern that results in a big hit is selected by allocating a judgment value in the intense heat notice table so that the ratio of the total number of judgment values assigned to the four intense heat notice patterns increases. , The ratio of selecting the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 4 is set high.

  In this case, when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means, the second effect is executed at a higher rate than when the determination to give a profit to the player is not made by the winning determination means. As a result of the determination being made, when a predetermined matching condition is satisfied and the second effect mode is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation that is controlled in the profit-giving state.

(Solution 29)
In any one of the solution means 18 to the solution means 28, the second effect determination means and the first effect mode having the higher ranking only when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player. It is possible to determine the second effect mode in which the predetermined matching condition can be satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the intense heat notice patterns Nos. 2 to 4 that can be selected only when the determination result is a big hit are set in the intense heat notice table.

  In this case, it is possible to determine the first effect mode having a higher rank and the second effect mode in which a predetermined matching condition can be established only when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player. Thus, it is rare that the first effect mode having a higher order is displayed, and the first effect mode having the higher order is determined to be the second effect mode that satisfies a predetermined matching condition. Since it is difficult to satisfy the matched condition, it is possible to be confident that the player is controlled to be in a profit-giving state when the high-ranking second effect mode is displayed, and the order of the rarely displayed order The blissfulness with respect to a high 2nd production aspect can be improved.

(Solution 30)
In any one of the solving means 3 to 29, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of second effect determination tables in which a second determination value within a predetermined range is set, and the second effect execution determination means and the second effect execution determination means The second effect determining means determines whether to execute the second effect using the second effect determination table corresponding to the display pattern among the plurality of types of second effect determination tables, and the second effect determination unit. Which of the effect modes is to be displayed is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the second effect determination table is an intense heat notice table provided according to the variable display pattern.

  In this case, in order to determine whether or not to execute the second effect using the second effect determination table corresponding to the display pattern and to determine which of the second effect modes is displayed, the determination of the winning determination means While determining whether or not to execute the second effect according to the result, it is possible to determine which of the second effect modes is displayed.

(Solution means 31)
In the solving means 30, the second effect execution determination means determines whether to execute the second effect depending on whether or not the random number stored in the updated random number storage means matches the second determination value in the predetermined range. Determine whether.

  In this embodiment, the intense heat warning pattern random numbers are updated within the numerical range of 0 to 201 within the execution area of 1 byte, and the intense heat warning pattern random numbers stored in the RAM 111c are the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 4. It is determined whether or not to determine the intense heat announcement pattern numbers 1 to 4 in step S133 of the intense heat announcement selection process depending on whether or not the determination value assigned to the heat announcement pattern is matched.

  In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the second effect depending on whether or not the random number stored by the updated random number storage means matches the second determination value within a predetermined range, but the second effect is executed. Even if it is determined, display control of the second effect mode is not performed unless a predetermined matching condition is satisfied. For this reason, even if the random number is updated within a predetermined numerical range within the 1-byte information amount, the second effect mode can be displayed and controlled at a ratio (1/256) or less that is possible with the 1-byte information amount. And the ratio which carries out display control of the 2nd production mode can fully be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of information necessary for updating the random number by the random number updating means while realizing the second rendering mode that is rarely displayed.

(Solution means 32)
In any one of the solving means 3 to the solving means 31, the predetermined matching condition is displayed by the effect image display control means among the first effect modes determined by the first effect determining means. It is that the specific information of a part or all of the production mode and the second production mode determined by the second production determination unit match.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined condition is that the character to be displayed in the selected advance notice pattern among the plurality of types of character display of the wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and the monster, and the selected intense It is whether or not the character displayed as an image with the thermal notice pattern matches. The unique information is a character of a wolf man, Dracula, Franken, or Monster. If the advanced notice pattern has a plurality of levels of image display characters, it is only necessary that the characters match part of the characters. If the advanced notice pattern has one stage of image display, all The character will match.

  In this case, a part or all of the first effect modes displayed by the effect image display control unit among the first effect modes determined by the first effect determining unit and the second effect determined by the second effect determining unit. When the unique information matches the aspect, the second effect mode is displayed on a part or all of the first effect mode, and the second effect mode may be displayed. It can be noticed. Moreover, even if it is not a flashy production like a production member, there is a possibility that the second production mode may be displayed every time the first production mode is displayed by the production image display control means, and further attention is paid to the first production mode. Can be made.

(Solution means 33)
In any one of the solving means 10 to 32, when the match condition determining means determines that only the effect member is expressed by the first effect determining means, the predetermined match condition is satisfied. It is not determined to be.

  In this embodiment, the selected advance notice pattern is an advance notice pattern that only drives the character bodies 150, 152, 154 (for example, the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern numbers 2, 5, 10). In some cases, the character images 70 to 73 of the wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and the monster are not displayed, and a predetermined matching condition is not satisfied.

  In this case, a part or all of the first effect mode expressed by the effect member driving unit in the first effect mode determined by the first effect determining unit and the second effect mode determined by the second effect determining unit. And the unique information do not match, and the second effect mode is not displayed.

(Solution 34)
In any one of the solving means 1 to 33, the third effect executing means displays the dark state so that the entire area displayed on the display unit is difficult to view or cannot be visually recognized, and then the third effect. The third effect displaying the aspect is executed by the effect image display control unit, and the third effect determining unit is configured to execute the third effect when the third effect execution determining unit determines to execute the third effect. After displaying the dark state, it is determined which of the third effect modes is to be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the dark transition mode is the dark transition image 83. The function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 is based on the lightning bolt notice pattern random number and the judgment value set in the lightning bolt notice table in steps S151 to S154 of the lightning notice selection process (this implementation). In the form, based on whether or not the judgment value distributed to the lightning bolt notice pattern numbers 1 to 6 matches the lightning bolt notice pattern random number), when the judgment to execute the lightning bolt notice effect is made, In step S151 to step S154, an effect mode (in this embodiment, a lightning warning pattern) is determined based on the lightning warning pattern random number and the determination value set in the lightning warning table.

  In this case, after the dark turn mode is displayed so that the entire area displayed on the display unit by the third effect executing means is difficult or impossible to view, the dark change mode is displayed by displaying the third effect mode. The player can no longer pay attention to the information related to whether or not the privilege can be granted (determination information by the winning determination means and the notice effect), and the effect (third effect mode) that the player wants to be conscious of is effective. It can make you conscious. Therefore, by making the presentation other than information related to whether or not the privilege can be granted effective, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 35)
In any one of the solving means 1 to 34, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of third effect determination tables in which a third determination value in a predetermined range is set, and the third effect execution determination means and the third effect execution determination means The third effect determination means uses the third effect determination table according to the display pattern and the determination result of the effect condition establishment determination means among the plurality of types of third effect determination tables. It is determined whether or not to execute, and it is determined which of the third effect modes is to be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the third effect determination table is a daylight background lightning notice table provided according to a variable display pattern and a background image (day background image 81, night background image 82), night background lightning. It is a notice table.

  In this case, it is determined whether to execute the third effect using the third effect determination table corresponding to the display pattern and the determination result of the effect condition establishment determination means, and any of the third effect modes is displayed. In order to determine whether or not to perform, it is determined whether to execute the third effect according to each determination result (including the determination result of the winning determination means), and which of the third effect modes is to be displayed. can do.

(Solution 36)
In the resolution means 34 or the resolution means 35, the third effect execution means may not display the third effect mode after displaying the dark mode as the third effect.

  In this embodiment, it is a variation display pattern other than the variation display pattern of variation numbers 23 to 31 (the variation display pattern in which spotlight advance notice and accessory reach is executed), and the lightning advance notice pattern of lightning advance notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 This is a case where the dark image 83 is displayed in the display area 42 as a blackout gasse effect based on the above.

  In this case, even if the third effect mode by the third effect execution means is not displayed, the third effect mode is displayed after the dark mode is displayed even if the dark mode is displayed by displaying the dark mode. Is not always displayed, and attention can be paid to the effect displayed on the display unit even after the dark state is displayed. Therefore, by making attention to the effect displayed on the display unit even after the dark mode is displayed, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution means 37)
In any one of the solution means 34 to the solution means 36, the third effect execution means includes a first dark change effect execution means for displaying the first dark change state, and a second dark change mode having a higher dark change level than the first dark change mode. Second darkening effect execution means for displaying the first darkening effect execution means, and after the first darkening effect is displayed by the first darkening effect execution means, the second darkness change effect execution means is displayed after the first darkness change mode is not displayed. To display the second darkening mode.

  In the present embodiment, the first darkening effect executing means is a control for displaying the darkening image 83 in the display area 42 as the first blackout effect based on the lightning warning pattern number 1-6. The darkening effect executing means is a control for displaying the darkening image 83 on the display area 42 as the second blackout effect based on the lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern numbers 2-6.

  In this case, after displaying the first darkening mode by the first darkening effect execution unit, the second darkening mode execution unit displays the second darkness mode after the first darkening mode is hidden, thereby allowing the player to It becomes impossible to pay attention to the information related to whether or not the privilege is granted step by step, and it is possible to effectively recognize other effects (third effect mode) other than the information related to whether or not the privilege is displayed displayed on the display unit. it can. Therefore, by making the presentation other than information related to whether or not the privilege can be granted effective, the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution means 38)
In any one of the solving means 34 to 37, the third effect execution means displays a flash in the dark mode at a predetermined timing as the third effect mode after the dark mode is displayed. And a dark image display control means for displaying the image based on the display pattern in an effect mode that can be visually recognized in the dark mode by being illuminated by the brightness of the flash light by the flash display control unit.

  In this embodiment, the flash is the lightning 87, and the flash display control means is a control for displaying the lightning 87 on the display area 42 based on the lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5. The dark symbol display means is a control for displaying the left decorative symbol 80a or the right decorative symbol 80c in the display area 42 together with the lightning 87 based on the lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5.

  In this case, as a third effect mode after displaying the dark mode, a flash is displayed in the dark mode at a predetermined timing, and then the image based on the display pattern can be visually recognized by being illuminated by the brightness of the flash. By displaying in an effect mode, the flash display by the flash display control means is an effect unique to the dark mode, and the display unit derives the first display mode in an effect mode different from the normal mode, thereby producing the third effect. An aspect can be noted.

(Solution 39)
In the solving means 38, the front unit has a light emitting area formed on an outer surface of the front unit, in which a light emitting operation is performed by light emitted from a predetermined light source to perform the staging operation, The effect execution means includes a light emission operation means for performing the light emission operation in the light emission area, and the light emission operation means is displayed in the light emission area when the flash display control means displays the flash in the dark state. The light emitting operation is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined light sources are LEDs 140l and 140m, and the light emitting areas are effect lamps 44a and 44b. The light emitting operation means is a part that controls lighting and blinking of the effect lamps 44a and 44b based on the lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5.

  In this case, when the flash display control means displays the flash in the dark mode, the flash operation is performed in the light emitting area, and the flash is displayed in the dark mode at a predetermined timing, and then the brightness of the flash is illuminated. As a result, not only the image based on the display pattern is displayed in the dark mode, but also the light emitting operation is performed in the light emitting area, which is effective for the third mode displayed on the display unit. Can attract attention.

(Solution means 40)
In any one of the solving means 34 to 39, the peripheral control means is either one of a first background image and a second background image different from the first background image in the display unit. A background image display control means for controlling the display of the image, wherein the third effect execution means displays the background image displayed before displaying the dark change mode as the third effect mode after the dark change mode is displayed. Background image switching display control means for switching to a different background image for display.

  In the present embodiment, the first background image is the daytime background image 81 of the daytime background, and the second background image is the night background image 82 of the night background. In the background image display control means, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 switches the ON / OFF of the day / background flag in step S156 of the lightning bolt notice selection process, and receives instructions from the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. Basically, the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the display of the daytime background image 81 and the night background image 82 in the display area 42. The background image switching display control means selects the lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern number 3 in steps S152 and S153 of the lightning warning selection process by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and in step S156 of the lightning warning selection process. This is the part that switches the daytime background flag ON and OFF.

  In this case, as the third effect mode after the dark mode is displayed, by switching to a background image that is different from the background image displayed before the dark mode is displayed, the effect executed this time Although only the background image is switched, it is possible to improve the expectation that some kind of effect will be executed in the effect executed after the next time.

(Solution 41)
In the solving means 40, the third effect determining means has a higher rate when the second background image is displayed by the background image display control means than when the first background image is displayed. The third effect mode is determined by the flash display control means and the dark image display control means.

  In this embodiment, the lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5 for executing the lightning flash warning are selected in the night background lightning warning table selected when the night background image 82 is displayed (the daytime background flag is OFF). Is set high.

  In this case, when the second background image is displayed by the background image display control means, the flash effect executing means determines the third effect mode at a higher rate than when the first background image is displayed. When the second background image is displayed, since the ratio of displaying the third effect mode by the flash display control means and the dark image display control means is high, the flash display control means in the effect executed after the next time. And the expectation that the 3rd effect aspect by the image display control means at the time of darkness will be displayed can be improved.

(Solution means 42)
In the solution means 40 or the solution means 41, the effect condition satisfaction determination means determines that the predetermined effect condition is satisfied based on the display control of the second background image by the background image display control means. To do.

  In the present embodiment, when the night background image 82 is displayed (the daytime background flag is in the OFF state), it is determined that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied.

  In this case, since it is determined that a predetermined effect condition is established based on the display control of the second background image, the effect execution frequency (depending on the type of the background image controlled by the background image display control unit ( It is possible for the player to recognize that the control has been performed such that the frequency of presentation of the effect members in the first effect and the execution frequency of the third effect) are increased.

(Solution means 43)
In any one of the solving means 1 to 42, the peripheral control means is an effect executed after displaying the first display mode and before displaying the determination result by the winning determination means, The first display mode post-effect execution means further executes the effect corresponding to the pattern by the effect image display control means, and the first display mode post-effect execution execution means performs the sixth effect mode by the effect image display control means. After the first display mode after the first display mode is displayed and the first display mode after the first display mode is executed by the first display mode after the first display mode is executed. The second effect after the first display mode in which the effect image display control means displays the same effect mode as the sixth effect mode displayed in the first effect after the first display mode. First And a second presentation execution means after the display mode, wherein the display pattern storage means performs the first presentation after the first display mode and / or the second presentation after the first display mode after the first display mode. The display pattern selecting means includes the plurality of types of display patterns executed by the effect executing means and / or the second effect executing means after the first display mode, and the display pattern selecting means selects the display pattern from the display pattern storage means. In addition to determining whether to execute the first effect after the first display mode and / or the second effect after the first display mode, it is determined which of the sixth effect modes is to be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect after the first display mode is a super reach effect (wolf man reach effect, Dracula reach effect, Franken reach effect), and the first effect execution means after the first display mode is variable number 5 6, 6, 11, 12, 17, 18 based on the variable display pattern, the display area 42 executes a super reach effect. The second presentation after the first display mode is a super reach development production (wolf man reach development production, Dracula Reach development production, Franken Reach development production, Monster-kun reach development production), and the second production execution means after the first display mode. Is a part for executing the super reach effect and the super reach development effect in the display area 42 based on the change display patterns of the change numbers 7 to 10, 13 to 16, and 19 to 22.

  In this case, after the first display mode is displayed, the effect is executed before displaying the determination result by the winning determination means, and the effect according to the display pattern is executed by the effect image display control means. When an effect is executed after the effect before the first display mode is displayed and the second effect after the first display mode is executed, the effect is executed for a long period until the determination result of the winning determination means is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation that is controlled in the profit-giving state.

(Solution means 44)
In the solving means 43, the third effect executing means, as the third effect mode after displaying the dark mode, a spotlight display control unit that displays a spot light mode in the dark mode at a predetermined timing, and And a third effect mode display control means for displaying any of the third effect modes in the spotlight mode display area by the spotlight display control means, and the second effect execution means after the first display mode is When the spotlight display control means and the third effect mode display control means are executed as the third effect execution means, the first after the first display mode by the first effect execution means after the first display mode. The first display state in which the third effect mode displayed by the third effect mode display control means is displayed as the sixth effect mode without executing the effect. After running the second performance.

  In this embodiment, the spotlight mode is an image of the spotlight 88, and the spotlight display means is a part that controls the display of the spotlight 88 on the display area 42 based on the variation display pattern of the variation numbers 23 to 31. The third effect mode display control means is a part that controls display of any of the character images 70 to 74 on the display area 42 based on the variation display pattern of the variation numbers 23 to 31. When the variation display patterns with the variation numbers 23 to 31 are executed, after the spotlight effect is executed, the super reach development effect by the character displayed in the spotlight effect is performed without executing the super reach effect. Executed.

  In this case, the display of the spotlight by the spotlight display control means is an effect unique to the dark mode, and the first display that displays the third effect mode displayed by the third effect mode display control means as the sixth effect mode. By executing the second effect after the mode, the execution type of the second effect after the first display mode differs depending on the third effect mode displayed in the spotlight mode display area after the dark mode is displayed. Even after the mode is displayed, the third effect mode can be noted. When the spotlight display control means and the third effect mode display control means are executed as the third effect execution means, the first effect after the first display mode is executed by the first effect execution means after the first display mode. The stage where the 3rd effect mode was displayed by performing the 2nd effect after the 1st display mode which displays the 3rd effect mode displayed by the 3rd effect mode display control means as the 6th effect mode Therefore, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation that is controlled to the profit-giving state for the player.

(Solution 45)
In the solution means 43 or the solution means 44, the first display mode post-effect execution means makes a determination to give a profit to the player when the winning determination means makes a determination to give a profit to the player. An effect after the first display mode corresponding to the display pattern is executed at a higher rate than when it was not made.

  In the present embodiment, in the variable display pattern table, when the determination result is out of place (out of reach reach), the ratio of executing the super reach effect and the super reach development effect (changes such as change numbers 5, 7, 9,... When the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the super reach production and the super reach development effect (variation numbers 6, 8, 10,..., Etc.) is selected. The ratio is high.

  In this case, the first display mode corresponding to the display pattern at a higher rate when the determination that the profit should be given to the player is made by the winning determination means than when the determination that the profit should be given to the player is not made. By executing the subsequent effect, when the post-first display mode effect is executed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that is controlled in the profit-giving state.

(Solution means 46)
In any one of the solution means 43 to the solution means 45, the second display execution means after the first display mode is the first display mode when it is determined by the winning determination unit that a profit should be given to the player. The second first effect after the first display mode is executed at a higher rate than the first first effect after the first display mode is executed by the post first effect executing means.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display pattern table, when the determination result is a big hit, the super reach development is higher than the ratio of executing the super reach effect (the ratio of selecting the variable display patterns of the change numbers 6, 12, 18). It is configured such that the ratio of performing the effect (the ratio of selecting the variation display pattern of variation numbers 8, 10, 14, 16, 20, and 22) is increased.

  In this case, when it is determined by the winning determination means that a profit should be given to the player, the first effect after the first display mode is executed at a higher rate than when only the first effect after the first display mode is executed. By executing the second effect after the first display mode, when the second effect after the first display mode is executed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that is controlled in the profit-giving state.

(Solution 47)
In any one of the solution means 43 to the solution means 46, the second display execution means after the first display mode selects the display pattern only when it is determined by the winning determination means that a profit should be given to the player. The second effect after the first display mode displaying the sixth effect mode selectable by the means can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation display pattern table, the variation display pattern of variation number 31 that can be selected only when the determination result is a big hit (in the lightning announcement table, the lightning announcement pattern of lightning announcement pattern number 2 is selected. ) Is set.

  In this case, the second effect after the first display mode that displays the sixth effect mode that can be selected by the display pattern selection unit can be executed only when the winning determination unit determines that the profit should be given to the player. For this reason, when the sixth effect mode is displayed, it can be confident that the player is controlled in a profit-giving state, and the bliss level of the sixth effect mode can be improved.

(Solution 48)
In any one of the solution means 43 to the solution means 47, the first display mode post-production execution means does not display the third production mode after the dark display mode is displayed by the third production execution means. A first post-display-special special effect executing means capable of executing a post-first-display-special special effect different from the first post-display-form first effect and the first post-display-type second effect.

  In the present embodiment, the post-first display mode special effect is an accessory reach effect, and the post-first display mode special effect execution means includes variable display patterns and lightning bolts with variable numbers 32 and 33 for executing the accessory reach effect. This is a part that controls the display of the character reach effect on the display area 42 based on the lightning warning pattern of the warning pattern number 2, and controls the drive of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154.

  In this case, when the third effect mode is not displayed after the dark effect mode is displayed by the third effect executing means, after the first display mode different from the first effect after the first display mode and the second effect after the first display mode. Since the special effect can be executed, the third effect mode is not displayed after the dark mode is displayed, so that the player's expectation to be controlled in the profit-giving state is temporarily reduced. By executing the special effect after the display mode, it is possible to improve the expectation again, and it is possible to give the game a sense of interest. Further, for a player who recognizes the possibility that the special effect after the first display mode will be executed, the expectation that the special effect after the first display mode is executed even if the third effect mode is not displayed. It is possible to focus attention on the effects displayed on the display unit even after the dark mode is displayed.

(Solution 49)
In the solution means 48, the post-first display mode special effect executing unit executes the first post-display mode special effect that expresses the effect member by the effect member driving unit.

  In this embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are displayed by controlling the driving motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 in the accessory reach effect.

  In this case, by expressing the effect member by the effect member driving means as the first effect after the first display mode, the effect member that is not executed in the normal effect after the first display mode is displayed. It is possible to improve a sense of expectation that is controlled by the player in a profit-giving state.

(Solution 50)
In any one of Solution 2 to Solution 49, the display unit has a plurality of types of variable display areas in which a plurality of types of symbol information can be displayed in a variable manner, and the display control unit determines the result of determination by the winning determination unit And a variable display control means for variably displaying the plurality of types of symbol information in the plurality of types of variable display regions based on the display, and stopping and displaying the symbol information corresponding to the determination result in each of the variable display regions, The effect executing means displays the fourth effect mode in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player in an overlapping region that overlaps the plurality of types of variable display regions in the display unit.

  In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of symbol information are left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, and the plurality of types of variable display areas are a variable display of each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c. This is a variable display area. The multiple types of variable display areas are multiple types of symbol display areas. The variable display control means transmits the variable display pattern to the sub-integrated board 111 by the information output process (step S16) by the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101, and the variable display pattern by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. The process corresponding to the process is executed and information corresponding to the result of the process is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 causes the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 to be displayed. This is the part that controls the display of the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c. In addition, in a present Example, although there are multiple types of 4th production | presentation aspects, a single may be sufficient. Then, the display area 42 controls the display of the mini character images 90 to 93 corresponding to the mini character notice pattern in the display area overlapping the variable display area for displaying the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c in a variable manner. Yes.

  In this case, the fourth effect mode is displayed by displaying the fourth effect mode in a manner that is visible to the player in the overlapping area overlapping the multiple types of variable display region in which multiple types of symbol information are variably displayed. Sometimes, the player does not need to move the viewpoint from a plurality of types of symbol information to the fourth effect mode, and the display of the fourth effect mode can be naturally put in a view that the player can be aware of, and the game is monotonous. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Solution 51)
In the solving means 50, the fourth effect execution means displays the fourth effect mode in a state where the plurality of types of symbol information by the variable display control unit are prioritized over the fourth effect mode.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol layer 42c that displays the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is configured as a higher layer than the mini character layer 42c that displays the mini character images 90 to 93 according to the mini character notice pattern. In the display area 42, display control of the mini character images 90 to 93 is performed on the back of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c.

  In this case, a plurality of types of symbol information is visually recognized in front of the fourth effect mode by displaying the fourth effect mode in a state where the plurality of types of symbol information by the variable display control means are prioritized over the fourth effect mode. Therefore, a player who wants to watch a plurality of types of symbol information does not hinder the user from watching the symbol information and does not feel uncomfortable with the game.

(Solution means 52)
In the solution means 50 or the solution means 51, the variation display control means variably displays the plurality of types of symbol information in a translucent display mode.

  In the present embodiment, display control is performed on the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c displayed on the symbol layer 42c in a semi-transparent display mode.

  In this case, by variably displaying multiple types of symbol information in a semi-transparent display mode, the fourth effect mode can be seen on the back of the multiple types of symbol information variably displayed in the semi-transparent display mode. When the four effect modes are displayed, the player does not need to move the viewpoint from the plurality of types of symbol information to the fourth effect mode, and naturally puts the display of the fourth effect mode into a view that the player can be aware of. The game does not become monotonous, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Solution means 53)
In the solving means 52, the variable display control means displays the symbol information variably displayed in the variable display area only in the variable display area overlapping the overlapping area among the plurality of types of variable display areas in a translucent display mode. Display fluctuating.

  In this embodiment, among the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c variably displayed in the display area 42, mini character images 90 to 93 corresponding to the mini character notice pattern are displayed on the back side. Only the decorative symbols 80a and 80c are controlled to be displayed in a translucent display mode.

  In this case, only in the variable display area that overlaps the overlapping area among the multiple types of variable display areas, the symbol information that is variably displayed in the variable display area is variably displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, thereby making the player aware of it. Only the overlap area where the fourth effect mode is displayed can be seen, and the player can easily recognize the place where the fourth effect mode is displayed.

(Solution 54)
In any one of the solving means 50 to 53, the fourth effect executing means displays the plurality of types of symbol information in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol information to be stopped and displayed in each variable display area at a lower speed than the variable indication. And low-speed fluctuation display control means for variably displaying in an opaque display mode.

  In this embodiment, in the process in which the left decorative design 80a is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the left decorative design 80a is gradually shifted from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation, and the display mode of the left decorative design 80a is changed from translucent to opaque. Display control is performed to change the display mode. Similarly, after the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed, the right decorative symbol 80c is also displayed in the same manner as the right decorative symbol 80c is stopped and displayed. In addition, the display control is performed so that the display mode of the right decorative design 80c is changed from the translucent to the opaque display mode.

  In this case, after variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol information by the variation display control means, the symbol information to be stopped and displayed in each variation display area is variably displayed in a display mode that is slower than the variation display and opaque. When a plurality of types of symbol information is stopped and displayed, the player does not need to move the viewpoint from the fourth effect mode to the plurality of types of symbol information, and transitions to the display of the plurality of types of symbol information in a natural manner. Can be made. Therefore, a plurality of types of symbol information are not overlooked together with the fourth effect mode, and the player can watch the fourth effect mode with peace of mind.

(Solution means 55)
In the solving means 54, the fourth effect executing means sets the fourth effect mode to the non-display state at a timing at which the symbol information to be stopped and displayed first is variably displayed in the low-speed and opaque display mode by the low-speed fluctuation display control means. Display.

  In this embodiment, after the mini-character images 90 to 93 corresponding to the mini-character notice pattern are controlled to be hidden, the left decorative pattern 80a to be displayed in a stopped state among the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 80a to 80c is first displayed. The display control is performed so that the display mode of the left decorative pattern 80a is changed from the semi-transparent to the opaque display mode while gradually shifting from the high speed change to the low speed change.

  In this case, a plurality of types of symbol information can be obtained by hiding the fourth effect mode at the timing when the symbol information to be stopped and displayed first is variably displayed in the low-speed and opaque display mode by the low-speed variation display control means. When the stop display is performed, the fourth effect mode is not displayed, and the player is not prevented from gazing at a plurality of types of symbol information.

(Solution 56)
In any one of the solving means 50 to the solving means 55, the fourth effect executing means displays the fourth effect mode in the variable display area.

  In the present embodiment, the display area 42 has a display area with a smaller display area for the display area 42 than the variable display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. The display is controlled by.

  In this case, by displaying the fourth effect mode in the variable display area, when the fourth effect mode is displayed, the player needs to move the viewpoint from a plurality of types of symbol information to the fourth effect mode. Therefore, the display of the fourth effect mode can be naturally put in the field of view that the player can be aware of, the game does not become monotonous, and the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 57)
In the solving means 56, the variable display control means variably displays the plurality of types of symbol information in a display manner passing through the front of the fourth effect aspect displayed in the overlap area, and is displayed in the overlap area. Each symbol information is stopped and displayed on the front of any of the fourth effect modes.

  In the present embodiment, the left decorative pattern 80a is displayed in a variable manner in a display manner that passes through the front of the mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi and the mini character image 93 imitating Kai-chan in the display area 42. The left decorative pattern 80a is stopped on the front surface of the mini character image 93 that imitates Kai-chan among the character images (in this embodiment, the mini character image 93 is not displayed when the left decorative pattern 80a is stopped and displayed). it's shown. Further, the right decorative design 80c is variably displayed in a display mode that passes through the front of the mini character image 92 imitating a triplet (wolf man, Dracula, Franken) and the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi in the display area 42, Of these mini-character images, the right decorative design 80c is displayed on the front surface of the mini-character image 90 representing Hiroshi (in this embodiment, the mini-character image 90 is not displayed when the right decorative design 80c is stopped). Stop display.

  In this case, when the fourth effect mode is displayed by variably displaying the plurality of types of symbol information in the display mode that passes the front of the fourth effect mode displayed in the overlapping area, There is no need to move the viewpoint to the 4th effect mode, the display of the 4th effect mode can be naturally put in the field of view that the player can be aware of, the game is not monotonous, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed can do. In addition, by stopping and displaying each piece of symbol information in front of the fourth effect mode displayed in the overlapping area, a plurality of types of symbol information are also stopped and displayed for the player who is watching the fourth effect mode. Sometimes, it is not necessary to move the viewpoint from the fourth effect mode to a plurality of types of symbol information, and it is possible to shift to a display of a plurality of types of symbol information in a natural manner. Therefore, a plurality of types of symbol information are not overlooked together with the fourth effect mode, and the player can watch the fourth effect mode with peace of mind.

(Solution 58)
In any one of the solving means 50 to the solving means 57, the fourth effect mode is a plurality of types of fourth effect modes, and is displayed in each overlapping area corresponding to the fourth effect mode.

  In the present embodiment, the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the right decorative design 80c (the position corresponding to the lower right door 94a of the background layer 42a) and the back of the left decorative design 80a (in accordance with the mini character notice pattern) Three characters (position corresponding to the door 94b on the lower left side of the background layer 42a), a mini character image 91 representing the older sister Hiroshi, and the back of the right decorative design 80c (the position corresponding to the door 94c on the upper right side of the background layer 42a) A mini character image 92 simulating a wolf man, Dracula, Franken) and a mini character image 93 simulating a monster on the back of the left decorative pattern 80a (the position corresponding to the lower left door 94d of the background layer 42a) are displayed. ing.

  In this case, the fourth effect mode is a plurality of types of fourth effect modes, and each of the plurality of types of fourth effect modes is determined by being displayed in each overlapping area corresponding to the fourth effect mode. Since it is displayed in the given place (overlapping area), the player learns the meaning (the degree of jackpot expectation, etc.) of each fourth effect mode in association with the overlapping area where the fourth effect mode is displayed. It is possible to easily recognize the meanings of a plurality of types of fourth effects.

(Solution 59)
In any one of the solution means 50 to the solution means 58, the fourth effect determination means only performs all the effects of the fourth effect mode only when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player. The aspect can be determined.

  In this embodiment, in the mini character notice table, the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 11 that can be selected only when the determination result is a variable display pattern that is a big hit and displays all of the mini character images 90 to 93 is displayed. Is set.

  In this case, all the fourth effect modes are displayed because it is possible to determine all the effect modes of the fourth effect mode only when the winning determination means determines that the profit should be given to the player. Sometimes, it can be convinced that the player will be in a profit-giving state, and bliss can be improved.

(Solution 60)
In any one of the solving means 50 to 59, the main control means determines whether the first display mode is a mode different from the normal mode and a reach mode that is displayed rarely than the normal mode. A reach mode determining unit that determines whether the first display mode is set to the reach mode by the reach mode determining unit. It is possible to determine an effect mode including a specific fourth effect mode among the four effect modes.

  In the present embodiment, the reach mode is such that the combination of the left / right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is the same in the left / middle / right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, and the remaining medium decorative symbols 80b are changed. The reach state determination means determines whether or not the reach mode is set based on whether or not the reach determination random number and the reach determination value match in step S44 of the variable display pattern process. Part (Because it will be a big hit after the reach form is displayed, the part that determines whether or not to make a big hit based on whether or not the big hit judgment random number and the big hit judgment value match is executed Included). A specific 4th production mode is mini character picture 92 imitating a group of three (wolf man, Dracula, Franken). In the mini character notice table, it can be selected only when the judgment result is a variation display pattern that reaches reach (including a variation display pattern that is a big hit), and mimics a trio (wolf man, Dracula, Franken). Mini character preview patterns No. 3, 6, 8, 10, and 11 for displaying the mini character image 92 are set.

  In this case, the specific fourth effect mode can be determined only when the reach mode determination unit determines that the first display mode should be the reach mode, by determining the effect mode including the specific fourth effect mode. When “” is displayed, it is possible to increase the expectation that the player will be in a profit-giving state after reaching the reach mode.

(Solution means 61)
In any one of the solution means 50 to the solution means 60, the fourth effect determination means gives a profit to the player by the winning determination means when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means. It is possible to determine a combination of a specific fourth effect mode among the fourth effect modes at a higher rate than when the determination to be given is not made.

  In the present embodiment, the specific combination of the fourth effect modes is a combination of a character image 90 representing Hiroshi and a character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister. In the mini character notice table, mini character notice patterns of mini character notice pattern numbers 5 and 11 for displaying a combination of a character image 90 representing Hiroshi and a character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister are set. In addition, the variable display pattern whose determination result is a big hit is smaller than the variable display pattern in which the determination result is out of order, and the mini character notification pattern of the mini character notification pattern numbers 5 and 11 with respect to the total number of determination values assigned to all the mini character notification patterns. By assigning judgment values in the mini character notice table so that the ratio of the total number of judgment values assigned to is increased, when a variable display pattern whose judgment result is a big hit is selected, mini character notice pattern number 5, The ratio of selecting eleven mini character notice patterns is high.

  In this case, when it is determined that the profit should be given to the player by the winning determination means, the specific fourth rate is higher than when the determination that the profit determining means should not be given to the player is made. By being able to determine the combination of the effect modes, it is possible to increase the expectation that the player will be in a profit-giving state when the specific combination of the fourth effect modes is displayed. Therefore, the player does not pay attention to only one of the fourth effect modes (for example, the specific fourth effect mode in the solving means 60), and can make all the fourth effect modes conscious.

(Solution means 62)
In any one of the solving means 50 to the solving means 61, the first effect executing means gives priority to the other effect modes of the fourth effect mode in a state of giving priority to the plural types of symbol information and the fourth effect mode. The effect member is caused to appear by the effect member driving means in front of the plurality of types of symbol information and the fourth effect aspect displayed by the effect image display control means and displayed on the display unit.

  In the present embodiment, the character image corresponding to the developed notice pattern is smaller than the mini character layer 42c that displays the mini character images 90 to 93 according to the mini character notice pattern and the pattern layer 42c that displays the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. The notice character layer 42d that displays 70 to 73 (a character image 70 imitating a monster, a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, a character image 72 imitating a dracula, a character image 73 imitating Franken) is used as a higher layer. By configuring, the display area 42 controls the display of the character images 70 to 73 in front of the mini character images 90 to 93 and the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. Further, in front of display control of the mini character images 90 to 93 and the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c in the display area 42, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 (characters imitating Franken) according to the advanced notice pattern. A body 150, a character body 152 imitating Dracula, and a character body 154 imitating a wolf man are driven and controlled.

  In this case, in a state where priority is given to multiple types of symbol information and the fourth effect mode, other effect modes (first effect mode to third effect mode, fifth effect mode) of the fourth effect mode are displayed. Alternatively, by causing the effect member to appear in front of the plurality of types of symbol information and the fourth effect mode displayed on the display unit, the fourth effect mode is provided in front of the plurality of types of symbol information and the fourth effect mode. It is possible to visually recognize other production images and production members, and the player does not need to move the viewpoint from the plurality of types of symbol information to the production modes and production members other than the fourth production mode. The display of the effect mode and the appearance of the effect member can be naturally put in the field of view that the player can be aware of, and the game does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. Further, by visually recognizing an effect mode or effect member other than the fourth effect mode on the front surface (front) of the plurality of types of symbol information and the fourth effect mode, the fourth effect than the multiple types of symbol information and the fourth effect mode. Attention will be paid to the production mode and production members other than the mode preferentially. Therefore, when the effect image display control means and / or the effect member driving means are controlled by the effect execution means, the effect modes and / or effect members other than the fourth effect mode that the player wants to pay attention to are effectively noted. be able to.

(Solution means 63)
In any one of the solving means 2 to 62, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of fourth effect determination tables in which a fourth determination value in a predetermined range is set. The fourth effect determination means determines whether to execute the fourth effect using a fourth effect determination table corresponding to the display pattern among the plurality of types of fourth effect determination tables, and the fourth effect determination unit. Which of the effect modes is to be displayed is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth effect determination table is a mini character notice table provided in accordance with the variable display pattern.

  In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the fourth effect by using the fourth effect determination table corresponding to the display pattern, and determination by the winning determination means in order to determine which of the fourth effect modes is displayed. While determining whether to execute the fourth effect according to the result, it is possible to determine which of the fourth effect modes is to be displayed.

(Solution means 64)
In any one of the solving means 2 to 63, the peripheral control means is one of the first background image and the second background image different from the first background image in the display unit. A background image display control means for controlling display of the sound, and the sound output control means is predetermined by the sound output means when the background image display control means is executing display control of the first background image. The first normal sound output control means for outputting the first normal sound as the first sound output mode, and the sound output when the background image display control means is executing display control of the second background image. The second normal sound output control means for outputting the second normal sound different from the first normal sound as the first sound output mode by the means, and the display control of the second background image by the background image display control means. Run Special sound output control means for outputting, as the second sound output mode, a special sound different from the first normal sound and the second normal sound by the sound output means, The means further includes an output mode determination unit that determines whether or not the sound output mode output by the sound output unit is the special sound, and the sound change determination unit is configured to output the special sound by the output mode determination unit. When it is determined that the sound output mode is changed to the special sound, it is determined whether or not the sound output mode is changed to the special sound. It is determined whether to change to the first normal sound or the second normal sound.

  In the present embodiment, the first background image is the daytime background image 81 of the daytime background, and the second background image is the night background image 82 of the night background. In the background image display control means, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 switches the ON / OFF of the day / background flag in step S156 of the lightning bolt notice selection process, and receives instructions from the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. Basically, the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the display of the daytime background image 81 and the night background image 82 in the display area 42.

  The first normal sound is a daytime background normal sound, and the second normal sound is a night background normal sound. The first normal sound output means outputs a signal indicating the day / background normal sound data to the waveform control board 114 when the day / background flag is ON by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is a portion that outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on the daytime background normal sound data stored in the ROM 114b and outputs the daytime background normal sound. The second normal sound output means outputs a signal indicating night background normal sound data to the waveform control board 114 when the day / background flag is OFF by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. This is a part that outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on the night background normal sound data stored in the ROM 114b and outputs the night background normal sound. The output mode determination means is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and whether or not a special sound is output based on whether or not the special sound output flag is set in step S161 of the sound control process. It is a part to determine whether.

  In this case, when the first background image is displayed by the background image display control means, the first normal sound is output by the sound output means, and the second background image is displayed by the background image display control means. The sound output means controls the output of the second normal sound different from the first normal sound, so that the background image can be specified by the sound output mode, and the player can grasp the change of the background image more clearly Is possible. Further, the output control of the first normal sound or the second normal sound is performed according to the image controlled to be displayed by the background image display control means, and the sound change determination means when the output mode determination means determines that it is not a special sound. Since the special sound output control is executed based on the determination that the sound output mode is changed, the player is in some state when the special sound is output (particularly in a state in which the player is likely to be in a profit-giving state). )), It is possible to prevent the expectation for the profit-giving state from being lowered when the special sound is output, and the interest for the game is not lowered.

  Further, by synchronizing the change of the background image controlled by the background image display means and the change of the sound output mode, a state in which the special sound is output when the first background image is controlled to be displayed, It is assumed that a state where the player is different from the state in which the special sound is output when the second background image is being displayed is controlled, and when the special sound is output, the expectation for the profit-giving state is reduced. Can be prevented, and does not reduce the interest in games. Furthermore, since the display control means controls the output of the first normal sound, the second normal sound, and the special sound until the first display mode is displayed after the display control of the image is started, the first display mode is Even when an effect corresponding to the first display mode is executed after being displayed, no trouble is caused.

(Solution means 65)
In the solving means 64, the peripheral control means uses the first profit and the first profit as the profit to be given to the player when the winning judgment means determines that the profit should be given to the player. And a profit state determining means for determining any one of the second profit with high added value, and the sound change determining means is determined to be the first profit by the profit state determining means, And when it is determined that the sound is not the special sound by the output mode determination means, it is determined that the sound output mode is not changed, the profit state determination means is determined to be the first profit, and the When it is determined by the output mode determination means that the sound is the special sound, a determination is made to change the sound output mode.

  In the present embodiment, the first profit is a non-probability variable big hit that is not controlled to the probability fluctuation state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the second profit is a probability change big hit that is controlled to the probability fluctuation state after the big hit gaming state ends. It is. In the probability fluctuation state, the probability of being a big hit is higher than in a state other than the probability fluctuation state, so it can be said that the probability variation big hit has a higher added value than the non-probability big hit.

  In this case, it is determined that the normal sound is output controlled when the first benefit with low added value is determined, and the first value with high added value is output in the state where the first normal sound and the second normal sound are output. 2 is determined to be a second profit with a high added value only when a special sound is being output. Since the player plays the game with the aim of becoming the second profit, the player determines the second profit from the state in which the first normal sound and the second normal sound that are not determined to be the second profit are output. When the special sound to be determined is output, if the profit granting state occurs during the output of the special sound, the player infers that the second profit will be added, By paying attention to the determination result of the winning determination means displayed on the display unit, it is possible to enhance the expectation for the second profit when the special sound is output.

(Solution means 66)
In the solving means 65, the peripheral control means further includes a plurality of types of fifth effect determination tables in which a fifth determination value within a predetermined range is set, and the sound change determination means includes the plurality of types of fifth effect determination tables. Whether the sound output mode is to be changed using the fifth effect determination table according to the determination result of the winning determination unit, the determination result of the profit state determination unit, and the determination result of the output mode determination unit Determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, the fifth performance determination table is a non-probable variable big hit determination table provided according to the sound output mode (normal sound (day background normal sound, night background normal sound), special sound), respectively. A time determination table, a reach determination table, and a loss determination table.

  In this case, it is determined whether or not to change the sound output mode by using the fifth effect determination table according to the determination result of the winning determination unit, the determination result of the profit state determination unit, and the determination result of the output mode determination unit. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to change the sound output mode according to each determination result and determination result.

(Solution 67)
In any one of Solution 2 to Solution 66, the sound change determination unit does not change the sound output mode at a high rate when the winning determination unit does not determine that a profit should be given to the player. Make a decision.

  In the present embodiment, this is realized by configuring the reach time determination table and the off time determination table so that the rate at which it is determined that the sound output mode is not changed is high.

  In this case, it is determined that the sound output mode is not changed at a high rate when it is not determined to give a profit to the player, and the sound output mode is not frequently changed when a determination that no profit is given is made. For this reason, the player's interest in the special sound is diminished by frequently changing the sound output mode, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

(Solution 68)
In any one of the solving means 1 to the solving means 67, the component member is a game board in which a game area in which the launched game ball flows down is formed on the front side facing the player.

  In this case, since the rear unit is located behind the front unit and the rear unit is attached from the back side of the game board, the rear unit is usually difficult for the player to see. Yes.

(Solution 69)
In the solving means 68, the game board is formed by penetrating a part of the game board in the thickness direction thereof, and has a through-hole that makes it possible to visually recognize the dramatic operation by the operation mechanism of the rear unit from the front side. Prepare.

  If the operation mechanism is completely hidden behind the game board, nothing can be seen from the front side, but the solution means 69 can visually recognize the effect operation through the through hole. With such a structure, the player sees the production operation by the operation mechanism at a position deeper than the game board, so that the visual depth can be felt.

(Solution 70)
In the solving means 68 or the solving means 69, the rear unit has a mounting surface that is formed on the front side facing the back side of the game board, extends along the back side of the game board, and is in close contact with the back side.

  In this case, since the mounting surface of the rear unit is formed flat so as to match the back surface of the game board, the adhesion to each other is enhanced, and the accuracy is improved along with the ease of assembly.

(Solution 71)
In the solving means 69 or the solving means 70, at least one of the front unit and the rear unit is formed so as to protrude in the front-rear direction of the game board, and the front unit and the rear unit are attached to the game board in the state of being attached. It further has an insertion connecting part for connecting the front unit and the rear unit to each other through the through hole by being inserted into the through hole.

  In this case, since the front unit and the rear unit are not only individually attached to the game board but also connected to each other via the game board, the structure as a whole becomes stronger.

(Solution means 72)
In any one of the solving means 69 to the solving means 71, the front unit and the rear unit are formed through the through hole in a state where the front unit and the rear unit are attached to the game board. It further has a receiving space part that allows the outer surface of the continuous line to be continuous.

  In this case, the rear unit is not simply hidden behind the front unit, but the presence of the rear unit is not reduced. Is done. In addition, the front unit and the rear unit are integrated in the front-rear direction to create a visual depth, thereby providing a profound feeling and presence with a strong impact.

(Solution means 73)
In any one of Solution 8 to Solution 72, in a state where the rear unit is located behind the front unit, the operation mechanism is shielded from being visible from the front side when the operation mechanism is not operated. A shielding means is further provided.

  As a result, when the operation mechanism is inactive, its existence itself is not visually recognized, so that it is hardly conscious that there is a function of performing some operation there. In this state, when the operation mechanism is actually operated, the player feels a fresh taste due to the appearance of an unexpected performance operation, and can be more and more exciting.

(Solution 74)
In the solving means 73, the shielding means constitutes a part of the outer surface of the rear unit, and shields the operation mechanism of the rear unit in a state of being continuous with the outer surface of the front unit. including.

  In this case, since the operation mechanism of the rear unit is covered with a shielding member visually integrated with the front unit, the player does not notice the presence of the operation mechanism at first glance. Furthermore, since the operation mechanism is protected by the shielding member, for example, even when using a game ball, interference with the operation mechanism (game ball collision, biting, etc.) can be effectively prevented.

(Solution means 75)
In the solving means 74, the shielding means shields the operating mechanism by holding the shielding member at a predetermined stop position when the operating mechanism is not operated, while stopping the shielding member when the rear unit is operated. It further includes a movable mechanism that allows the operating mechanism to appear at a position that is visible from the front side by being displaced from the position.

  In this case, the shielding member does not simply cover the operation mechanism, but the operation mechanism appears at a position where the operation mechanism can be visually recognized by the displacement of the shielding member during operation. On the contrary, when the operating mechanism returns to the hidden stop position, the shielding member returns to its original state and covers it, so that even if the operating mechanism touches the player's eyes once, it is still hidden End up. For this reason, the existence of the operation mechanism is not easily recognized, and the fresh taste is not lost for a long time.

(Solution means 76)
In the solving means 74 or the solving means 75, the shielding means displaces the shielding member in such a manner that a stunning operation can be performed together with the operation mechanism when the rear unit is operated.

  In this case, the shielding member does not simply cover the operation mechanism, but also performs the performance operation together. For this reason, the movement of the shielding mechanism is added to the movement of the operation mechanism, and a production effect that is large in appearance is performed accordingly.

(Solution 77)
In any one of the solving means 8 to the solving means 76, the front unit and the rear unit can individually perform a stunning operation in the staging area.

  That is, the functions of the front unit and the rear unit are independent of each other, and each can operate independently. In this case, because the functions of the two units are independent, it is extremely easy to repair or replace only one of them or to perform maintenance or inspection work.

(Solution 78)
In any one of the solving means 8 to the solving means 77, the front unit and the rear unit can perform an effect operation in cooperation with each other in the effect area. In this case, since the two units cooperate with each other, the contents of the production operation can be made various, and the amount can be increased accordingly.

(Solution 79)
In the solving means 9 to the solving means 78, the effect member includes a plurality of movable members which are arranged so as to overlap each other when viewed in the front-rear direction of the rear unit and are connected to each other and relatively move.

  In this case, the effect operation body is not a flat existence but a three-dimensional existence having a thickness corresponding to the overlap of the movable members. For this reason, the production action body has a sense of visual depth, and can thereby exert a large presence.

(Solution 80)
In the resolution means 9 to the resolution means 79, the view authorization means for allowing the effect member and the drive source to be visually recognized from the outside of the rear unit in a state where the effect member and the drive source are accommodated in the standby accommodating portion. Is further provided.

  As described so far, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the configuration of the operation mechanism has been enhanced in order to increase the presence of the production action body and the fun of the movement. If the configuration is enhanced in this way, further convenience is required for repair, replacement, maintenance, and inspection opportunities. For this reason, in the solution means 80, even in the state in which the production operation body is accommodated, it is possible to visually recognize this from the outside, thereby ensuring convenience at the occasion of repair, replacement, maintenance, and inspection.

(Solution 81)
In the solving means 80, the viewing authorization means is provided at a position that is an outer surface of the rear unit, and is formed by partitioning an outer periphery of the standby accommodating portion at this position, and outside the standby accommodating portion. A transparent member that is visible from the side is included.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably ensure the convenience of repair, replacement, maintenance, and inspection of the operating mechanism by a very simple method.

(Solution means 82)
In the solving means 80 or the solving means 81, the viewing authorization means is provided at a position that is an outer surface of the rear unit, and a wall member that is formed by partitioning an outer periphery of the standby accommodating portion at this position; and the wall member And an open hole that opens the inside of the standby storage portion toward the outside of the rear unit.

  In this case, since the periphery of the standby accommodating portion is usually surrounded by the wall member, the operation mechanism is protected inside thereof. On the other hand, if repair, replacement, maintenance, or inspection of the operating mechanism is required, the inside can be actually confirmed through the opening hole, or tools can be accessed, so that workability is further improved.

(Solution 83)
In any one of Solution 9 to Solution 82, the rear unit is formed to open from the inside of the standby housing portion toward the appearance position, and through the opening, between the standby position and the appearance position. And a chamfered portion that is formed at an opening edge of the entrance and that has a downward slope from the appearance position to the standby position as viewed in the entrance direction of the effect member.

  If the standby housing portion is an aspect that protects the operating mechanism by a wall member or the like, the structure can withstand repeated or long-term use. On the other hand, the fact that the operating opportunity of the operating mechanism increases means that the frequency of mechanical troubles increases accordingly. For this reason, in the solution 83, in order to reduce relative contact, friction, and sliding as much as possible by increasing the operation opportunity, a chamfered portion (not only a flat surface but also a curved surface may be used) at the opening edge of the entrance / exit of the production operation body. ) Is formed. Thereby, the damage by friction and contact between members at the time of long-term use is reduced significantly.

(Solution 84)
In any one of the solving means 9 to the solving means 83, the rear unit is formed to open from the inside of the standby accommodating portion toward the appearance position, and through the opening, between the standby position and the appearance position. The entrance and exit of the stage member and the entrance and exit of the stage member can be opened and closed, and the stage member is allowed to appear at the appearance position with the entrance open. And an opening / closing member that shields the effect member at the standby position in the closed state and that is continuous with a part of the outer surface of the rear unit.

  The configuration of the opening / closing member is similar to the configuration of the shielding member of the solving means 7 to 11 (may be the same or different). In this case, the entrance / exit of the standby accommodating portion is opened / closed by an openable / closable member, and when the performance operating body appears, the opening / closing member opens the entrance / exit, and conversely, when the performance operating body returns to the standby position, the opening / closing member closes the entrance / exit. Shield the moving body. When the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the presence of the opening / closing member is lost on the outer surface of the rear unit and is inconspicuous, so that it is difficult to predict the presence of a mechanism such as an operating mechanism.

(Solution means 85)
In the solving means 84, the standby accommodating portion can accommodate the opening / closing member together with the effect member in a state where the opening / closing member closes the entrance / exit. In this case, the opening / closing member can be protected in addition to the effect operating body, and its presence can be well concealed.

(Solution means 86)
The solving means 85 further includes gripping permission means for allowing the standby accommodating portion to be gripped from the outside in a state where the opening / closing member is accommodated in the standby accommodating portion.

  As described above, even if the opening and closing member is accommodated in the standby accommodating portion, the advantage is great, but this time it becomes difficult to open the standby accommodating portion by human operation. There is also. For this reason, in the solution means 22, the openability of a standby | waiting accommodating part is ensured by employ | adopting the structure which can hold | grip this from the exterior, with the opening / closing member accommodated in the standby | waiting accommodating part. Such ease is particularly effective when it is necessary to open the standby accommodating portion in a situation where driving by an electric motor or the like cannot be performed.

(Solution 87)
In the solving means 86, the gripper permitting means is formed by notching a partition partitioning the periphery of the entrance / exit from the opening end in the entering direction, and a part thereof in a state in which the opening / closing member is accommodated in the standby accommodating portion. It includes a notch that exposes.

  In this case, the function of the gripping permission means can be easily realized by simply performing a simple process on the partition wall of the standby housing portion.

(Solution means 88)
In the solving means 87, the standby accommodating portion is located on the front side of the partition partitioning the periphery of the doorway in a state where the rear unit is attached to the game board, and the front side is located on the game board. It has a front bulkhead that is superposed behind the unit when it is attached, and the cutout portion matches the shape of the edge of the front bulkhead viewed from the front side and the outer shape of the front unit. It is formed in the mode which makes it.

  In the solving means 88, since the notch is formed in the partition wall, this is used from a decorative point of view. Such an aspect is particularly effective when the positions of the entrance / exit of the standby housing portion and the outer surface of the front unit are close to each other.

(Solution 89)
In any one of the solving means 84 to the solving means 88, the operation mechanism is configured by connecting the plurality of movable members constituting the effect member, and receives the power from the drive source to reciprocate the effect member. The opening / closing operation of the entrance / exit can be realized by power from the drive source in a state in which the opening / closing member is connected to the link mechanism.

  In this case, the movement of the effect operating body is realized by the link mechanism, but since the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is also realized, it is not necessary to prepare another power only for the opening / closing member.

(Solution 90)
In the solving means 89, the operating mechanism is swingably provided along the back surface of the game board, supports the first drive source at one of the main bodies extending from the swing center to both sides, and the other A swing member that slidably supports the effect member on the side, a first link mechanism that is installed on the swing member and that receives the power from the first drive source and slides the effect member, The entire attitude of the first link mechanism including the first drive source by operating by receiving power from a second drive source different from the first drive source and being connected to the swing member. And a second link mechanism for displacing.

  In this way, if the link mechanism is configured by two systems, further diversity is added to the operation of the effect operating body. Further, since the swing member of the first link mechanism supports the effect operating body and the drive source (first drive source) on both sides of the swing center, the mass of the effect operating body and the drive source are supported. Due to the balance with the mass, it is possible to keep the oscillation as a whole smoothly.

(Solution means 91)
In any one of the solving means 9 to the solving means 90, the rear unit has a plurality of effect members that can appear at different appearance positions in the effect area, and the effect members are mutually connected. The operation mechanism is operated within a range not causing interference.

  Thus, if it is the aspect with which the production | presentation action body is prepared in multiple numbers, the diversity in appearance will increase that much. For that reason, mechanical troubles can be prevented by operating the operation mechanism within a range in which the production operation bodies do not interfere with each other. It should be noted that the movable range of the operation mechanism may be designed so as not to interfere with each other, or may be an aspect in which interference between the operation mechanisms is avoided in the control.

(Solution 92)
In any one of the solving means 68 to the solving means 91, the front unit is formed to protrude to the front side in the effect area, and a plurality of decorative bodies for decorating the outer surface of the front unit in a three-dimensional shape; By arranging the plurality of decorative bodies in a state of being separated in a direction along the front surface of the game board, a space existing between the decorative bodies is formed, and a game ball can roll in this space. And a guide passage for guiding the game ball from above to below the effect area.

  As described above, since the front unit is in an arrangement that is most easily visible to the player, an aspect in which some decorative body is arranged on the front side is preferable. Furthermore, the solution means 92 does not end the decoration body as a simple decoration, but functions as a member for guiding the game ball. Therefore, the solution means 92 is extremely rational and interesting in appearance.

(Solution means 93)
In the solving means 92, the front unit is formed to project from the surfaces of the plurality of decorative bodies arranged to form the guide passage into the guide passage, and the direction of the rolling destination with respect to the game ball And a braking protrusion for applying a braking force to the game ball by relatively colliding with each other. Such an aspect is extremely effective when the decorative body originally has an uneven shape.

(Solution 94)
In the solution unit 92 or the solution unit 93, the front unit is formed at a position between the plurality of decorative bodies arranged separately from each other, and a passage wall surface that divides the back wall of the guide passage as viewed from the front side. A light-transmitting plate-like member that is disposed at a front surface position of the front unit so as to form the passage wall surface, and whose back surface is formed as an uneven braking surface having light diffusibility, and the plate-like member A light-emitting source that is disposed on the back side and transmits light to the front side through the plate-like member.

  In this case, the guide passage also serves as an effect area by decorative light emission, and the effect can be executed by causing the guide passage to emit light even when the game ball is not passing. In addition, the wall surface of the guide passage can exhibit different functions on both sides, which is a very rational aspect.

(Solution 95)
In the solving means 94, the braking surface of the plate-like member is formed in an uneven shape having visual uniformity with the surface shape of the decorative body.

  In this case, since the front unit is decorated with a decorative body, the game ball can be braked while maximizing the use of the decorative shape.

(Solution means 96)
In any one of the solving means 68 to 95, the front unit is formed at a position exposed on the front surface side, and a ball receiving portion that allows a game ball that has been launched into the game area to be temporarily retained; A discharge path formed at a position behind the surface and not exposed to the front surface side, which takes in and guides the game ball launched into the game area and allows the game ball to be discharged toward the ball receiving portion, and a game ball through the discharge path Guidance process visualizing means for making it possible to visually recognize the process of guiding the vehicle from the front side.

  The structure of the discharge passage is that it is as if the game ball has moved between two points instantaneously by passing it through a position where it is difficult to see (position not exposed to the front side) between the entrance and the exit. However, if it is difficult to see the game ball beyond the degree, it may be difficult to recognize that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage. For this reason, the solving means 96 eliminates such a problem by making it possible to visually recognize the process of the game ball passing through the discharge passage.

(Solution 97)
In the solving means 96, the guiding process visualizing means includes a front through hole formed through the outer surface of the front unit and leading from the front side to the discharge passage.

  There are various modes for visually recognizing the process in which the game ball is guided through the discharge passage. Here, a through hole (through hole) penetrating the outer surface of the front unit is employed. Since such a through hole can be realized by easy processing, it becomes a very practical aspect.

(Solution 98)
In the solving means 97, the opening of the front through hole is set smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, it is not necessary to form a through-hole that is larger than necessary as long as the presence of the game ball is visually recognized. For this reason, there is an advantage that the through-hole can be formed with a minimum amount of processing, and further, the decoration of the front unit is hardly damaged.

(Solution 99)
In any one of the solving means 96 to the solving means 98, the guiding process visualizing means constitutes a part of the outer surface of the front unit, and forms a wall surface of the guiding passage behind the outer surface. The outer surface member and the outer surface member are formed on the outer surface member, and the inside of the guide passage is invisible from the front surface side through the outer surface member by setting the reflectance of light from the front surface side higher than the back surface side, A semi-permeable membrane that makes it possible to visually recognize the process of guiding the game ball from the front side by projecting the outline of the game ball in the guide passage onto the outer surface member.

  Since the semipermeable membrane functions like a mirror due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the back side of the outer member, the inside of the guide passage is not normally seen through. However, since the outline is projected onto the semipermeable membrane when the game ball passes immediately behind the outer surface member, it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball passes.

(Solution 100)
In any one of the solving means 96 to the solving means 99, the front unit is formed at a position behind the outer surface and not exposed to the front side, and takes the game ball launched into the game area and guides it to a predetermined passage opening. And a passage guidance process visualizing means for allowing the process of guiding the game ball through the passage guidance path to be visually recognized from the front side.

  The above-described passage opening causes a certain determination trigger (for example, a normal symbol determination trigger) when a game ball passes through here. If such a passage opening is hidden in the back of the front unit, it will be difficult to confirm whether or not the determination has actually been made. Therefore, the solution means 100 also visually recognizes how the game ball passes through the passage opening. Make it possible. Thereby, it becomes difficult for the player to miss the trigger of determination related to his / her own interest, and the player can keep his / her concentration on the game.

(Solution means 101)
In any one of the solving means 8 to the solving means 100, when the winning determination means is performed, the front unit variably displays predetermined determination information and displays the determination result by the winning determination means on the display unit. In addition, it further comprises a determination information display means capable of stopping and displaying the determination information in a manner according to the determination result by the winning determination means, the determination information display means is formed on the outer surface of the front unit, A light emitting region in which a light emitting operation is performed to display the determination information, and a light guide path that is disposed at a position deeper than the outer surface of the front unit and guides light emitted from a predetermined light source toward the light emitting region. Have.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, for example, when a trigger such as a start prize is generated, profit determination (for example, determination based on random number acquisition) is performed. Then, if the determination result is true, the player is given a benefit of shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, or changing the determination probability relatively high. In order to display such determination information, a light emitting region is formed on the outer surface of the front unit, and the variation display and stop display of the determination information are performed by lighting / flashing the light emitting region. At this time, the light emitting region itself is not a light source, but light emitting operation (lighting or blinking) is performed by guiding light emitted from another light source through a light guide path. The player can read the determination result from such a light emitting operation and know whether or not a profit is given to the player.

(Solution means 102)
In the solving means 101, the light guiding path has a relatively high light shielding property on the inner wall so as to suppress the transmission of light to the outside of the light emitting region.

  As described above, since the determination information is a very important concern for the player, the display thereof must always be clear. For this reason, the solving means 102 prevents the light emission operation from being performed out of the light emitting area by suppressing the transmission (or leakage) of the light from the light guiding path to the outside of the light emitting area.

(Solution 103)
In the resolution means 101 or the resolution means 102, the determination information display means is a dark-colored material attached to the front unit and positioned behind the light emitting area and penetrating through the dark material. It has a light guide component.

  When the light guiding path is formed inside the part, the light shielding property can be easily and reliably obtained by making the material of the part itself a dark color system (for example, black, brown, charcoal gray, etc.).

(Solution 104)
In any one of the solution means 101 to the solution means 103, the determination information display means can display the determination information by switching the light emitting region to a light emitting state or a non-light emitting state by turning on or off the light source. The light emitting region is shaped as a decorative shape whose contour shape simulates a design.

  As described above, when the determination information is displayed by the light emitting operation (lighting or extinguishing) of the light emitting area, in a extreme case, simple point light emission may be used. However, in this case, the decorative shape of the front unit may be wasted or the judgment information may be mismatched. Therefore, the solving means 104 attaches a decorative shape imitating a pattern to the contour shape of the light emitting area. Yes. Thereby, determination information can be displayed while utilizing the decorative shape of the front unit.

(Solution 105)
In any one of Solution 1 to Solution 104, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is that a game ball is driven into a game area (game area 12 in this embodiment) according to the operation of the operation means (in this embodiment, the operation handle 18), and the game that has been driven The image display means (in this embodiment, the display area in the rendering device 40) is provided on the condition that the ball wins the starting opening (in this embodiment, the starting winning opening 45, the electric starting winning opening 46) provided in the game area. 42), the symbol information (in this embodiment, left decorative symbol 80a, middle decorative symbol 80b, right decorative symbol 80c) is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result of the symbol information is stopped and displayed. Further, when a profit granting state (in this embodiment, a big hit gaming state) occurs, the big winning opening (in this embodiment, the large winning opening 61) provided in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner, A winning is made possible, and based on the winning, a gaming privilege (awarding a prize ball, writing a point on a magnetic card, etc.) is given to the player.

(Solution 106)
In any one of Solution 1 to Solution 104, the gaming machine is a rotating game machine.

  In addition, as a basic configuration of the swivel-type gaming machine, after the symbol information string (for example, a plurality of reel strings with a plurality of symbol information) composed of a plurality of symbol information is variably displayed, the display result of the symbol information is stopped. In addition to displaying a fluctuation display means for displaying, the display of the fluctuation of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start operation means (for example, the operation lever), and the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or the elapse of a predetermined time The display of the variation of the symbol information is stopped based on And it is provided with the profit provision state generation | occurrence | production means which generate | occur | produces a profit provision state (big hit game state) on the condition that symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode.

(Solution 107)
In any one of Solution 1 to Solution 104, the gaming machine is a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a rotary gaming machine are fused.

  In addition, as a basic configuration of a gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a rotary gaming machine are fused, a symbol information string composed of a plurality of symbol information (for example, a plurality of reel rows with a plurality of symbols) is variably displayed. After that, it is provided with a fluctuation display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information, and starting the fluctuation display of the symbol information based on the operation of the start operation means (for example, the operation lever), and the stop operation means (for example, The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button) or the elapse of a predetermined time. And it is provided with the profit grant state generation means which generates a profit grant state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and the symbol information is used by using a game ball as a game medium. A predetermined number of game balls are required at the start of the change, and a large amount of game balls are paid out when a profit granting state occurs.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to execute a notice effect that does not cause the player to lose interest and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a front view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine of the state which open | released the main body frame and the front frame. It is a front view which shows a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a front unit and a rear unit. It is the front view which showed the rear unit independently. It is the front view which showed the state which removed the cover member from the rear unit. It is detail drawing of the character body located in the right side seeing from the front. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is detail drawing of the character body located upwards from the front. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is detail drawing of the character body located in the left side seeing from the front. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of the character body of FIG. It is two perspective views which divided and showed the state which combined the front unit and the rear unit mutually. It is the perspective view which showed the front unit and the rear unit from the angle different from FIG. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a front unit. It is the figure which expanded and showed the right side edge part of the front unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view in the left side edge part of a front unit. It is the perspective view which showed the overlapping relationship of a front unit and a rear unit. In FIG. 22, it is a top view of the operation | movement mechanism containing the cross section which follows XX. It is the figure which expanded and showed the lower edge part of the front unit. It is a block diagram which shows a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by the main control board. It is a table | surface figure which shows the random number updated by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process performed with a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination process used as the subroutine of a special symbol fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows the change display pattern setting process used as the subroutine of a special symbol change process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation | variation display pattern selected by the main control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the form of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a notice effect and a reach effect. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process performed with a subintegrated board. It is a table | surface figure which shows the random number updated with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol setting process used as the subroutine of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the notice selection process used as the subroutine of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the advanced type advance notice selection process used as the subroutine of an advance notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the development type notice pattern for daytime backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows the development notice pattern for night backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure which shows an evolution type notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the intense heat notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the intense heat warning pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure showing an intense heat notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the lightning bolt notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the lightning warning pattern for daytime backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows the lightning warning pattern for night backgrounds selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure showing a lightning bolt notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the mini character notice selection process used as the subroutine of a notice selection process. It is a list figure which shows the mini character notice pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a table | surface figure which shows a mini character notice pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control process used as the subroutine of effect control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the sound determination table which determines a sound output aspect. It is a flowchart which shows the sound change determination process used as the subroutine of a sound control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the screen structure by a liquid crystal display.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine with the main body frame and the front frame opened.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but a game medal is used as a game medium, and a symbol information string (for example, a plurality of reel strings with a plurality of symbol information attached thereto). ) Is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable information display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information is provided, and the variable information is started to be displayed based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The present invention can also be applied to a spinning-type game machine (slot machine) that stops display of fluctuations in symbol information based on operation of means (for example, a stop button) or elapse of a predetermined time. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a game machine (parrot) in which a pachinko machine that performs a game of a rotary game machine using a game ball as a game medium and a rotary game machine are fused.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a game board 4, a front frame 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed in a vertically rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left and right frame members, and has a lower plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the lower front side of the outer frame 2. A main body frame 3 is attached to the front side of the outer frame 2 by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. Further, the main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 8, the game board mounting frame 9, and the mechanism mounting frame 10 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame 8 formed on the front side of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2.

  A game board 4 is attached to the game board mounting frame 9 integrally formed at the rear part of the front frame body 8 so as to be detachable and replaceable from the front. A guide rail 11 having an outer rail and an inner rail is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 4, and a game area 12 is defined inside the guide rail 11. A low-frequency speaker 14 is mounted via a speaker mounting plate 13 near one side of the front lower portion of the front frame 8 positioned below the game board mounting frame 9. A launch rail 15 that guides a game ball toward the launch path of the game board 4 is attached to the upper portion in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 8 in an inclined manner. On the other hand, a lower front member 16 is attached to a lower portion in the lower area of the front surface of the front frame body 8. A lower pan 17 is provided substantially at the center of the front surface of the lower front member 16, and an operation handle 18 is provided closer to one side.

  A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is provided on the rear surface of the main body frame 3 (front frame body 8) opposite to the side where the hinge mechanism 7 is provided. A locking device 19 having a function of locking the front frame 5 is attached. The locking device 19 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 21 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 20 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the main body frame 3 in a closed state, and an open side of the front frame 5. There are provided a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 23 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 22 provided on the rear surface and lock the front frame 5 in a closed state. Then, the key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 24 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 21 and the closing tool 20 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is released. When the key is locked and the key is rotated in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 23 and the closing tool 22 of the front frame 5 is released, and the front frame 5 is unlocked. ing. The front end portion of the cylinder lock 24 is exposed to the front surface of the lower front member 16 through the front frame 8 and the lower front member 16 so that the unlocking operation can be performed by inserting a key from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Are arranged.

  A front frame 5 is attached to one side of the front surface of the main body frame 3 by a hinge mechanism 25 so as to be opened and closed forward. The front frame 5 includes a door body frame 26, a side decoration device 27, an upper plate 28, and an acoustic illumination device 29. The door main body frame 26 is formed of a pressed metal frame member, and is formed to have a size that covers a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 8 to the upper edge of the lower front member 16. A substantially circular opening window 30 through which the game area 12 of the game board 4 can be seen through from the front is formed at substantially the center of the door body frame 26. Further, a window frame 31 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 30 is provided on the rear side of the door body frame 26, and a transparent plate 32 is attached to the window frame 31.

  On the front side of the door main body frame 26, around the opening window 30, side decoration devices 27 are mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 28 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic decoration device 29 is mounted on the upper portion. The side decoration device 27 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 33 in which a lamp substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 33 in the vertical direction, and a lens 34 corresponding to a light source disposed on the lamp substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 29 includes a transparent cover body 35, a speaker 36, a speaker cover 37, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

  Next, various components provided in the game area 12 partitioned on the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board 4.

  An effect device 40 is disposed in the central portion of the game area 12. The stage device 40 includes a special symbol display 41 that variably displays a special symbol by lighting a plurality of light emitters (for example, four LEDs 176), and a plurality of types of three symbols including left, middle, and right symbols. The liquid crystal display 116 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 25) that displays the decorative design in a variable manner and displays various effects in the display area 42, and a plurality of light emitters (for example, four LEDs 182) are turned on to give a predetermined condition. Is established (the game ball is won at the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46), but the special figure memory lamp 54 for displaying the memory number (start memory number) for which the change of the special symbol has not yet started, The front display board 43 for attaching the symbol display 41, the liquid crystal display 116, and the special figure memory lamp 54 to the surface (game area 12) of the game board 4 is provided. Further, effect lamps 44 a and 44 b are attached to the upper right portion of the effect device 40. These effect lamps 44a and 44b perform lighting display in accordance with the effect display by the display area 42.

  Below the stage device 40, there are provided a start winning opening 45 and an electric start winning opening 46 having a pair of opening and closing blades 47 below the starting winning opening 45. In the electric start winning port 46, when the display result of the normal symbol display 50 is "winning", the opening / closing blade 47 is in a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds in the normal state or 3 seconds in the probability fluctuation state). ) Controlled to be opened. In this embodiment, the starting winning port 45 can always win a game ball from above, and the electric starting winning port 46 is blocked by the starting winning port 45 at the top, and the open / close wing 47 is closed. In this case, the game ball is in a state where it is impossible to win a prize. Therefore, the game ball can be won only when the opening / closing wing 47 is in the open state.

  In addition, the game balls won in the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 are detected by a start opening sensor 55 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 25), and a special symbol indicator is displayed based on this detection (predetermined condition is established). In 41, a special symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display in the display area 42) is permitted. When a game ball wins the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 and the game ball is detected by the start opening sensor 55, the display result of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is hit (specific display mode) The jackpot determination random number for determining whether or not Also, the jackpot determination random number extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 and is detected by the start opening sensor 55 during the change of the special symbol, is a predetermined number ( For example, up to four) can be stored, and the stored number (starting stored number) is displayed by lighting of the special-purpose memory lamp 54 composed of a plurality of light emitters (for example, four LEDs 182). The special figure memory lamp 54 is arranged on the right side of the game area 12. Further, in this embodiment, two start winning ports, a start winning port 45 and an electric start winning port 46, are provided as winning ports for which the variation display of special symbols is permitted. The number of installation is not limited to these. For example, only one of the start winning opening 45 and the electric starting winning opening 46 may be provided.

  On the left side of the game area 12, a normal symbol display 50 is provided for variably displaying normal symbols by lighting and blinking of light emitters (for example, LEDs). Also, a probability variation state lamp 51 that is turned on / off (in this embodiment, lighted in the probability variation state) is attached below the normal symbol display 50 depending on whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. ing. Below the normal symbol display 50, a left gate having a gate switch 53a and a right gate having a gate switch 53b are provided. When the game ball is detected by the gate switch 53a or the gate switch 53b based on the game ball passing through the left gate or the right gate, the normal symbol display 50 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. That is, the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 50 is permitted in accordance with the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 53a and the gate switch 53b. It should be noted that, when a game ball is detected by the gate switch 53a and the gate switch 53b, a normal random number for determining whether or not to win the normal symbol display result on the normal symbol display 50 is extracted. In addition, the normal random number per normal symbol extracted based on the fact that the game ball passes the left gate or the right gate during the normal symbol variation and is detected by the gate switches 53a and 53b is a predetermined number (for example, 4) can be stored, and the stored number is displayed by turning on the general memory lamp 56 composed of a plurality of light emitters (for example, 4 LEDs). The general memory lamp 56 is arranged on the left side of the game area 12.

  Below the electric start winning opening 46, a large winning opening device 60 having an open / close plate 62 for opening and closing a horizontally long rectangular winning opening 61 is disposed. The special prize opening device 60 includes a solenoid 63 that serves as a driving source for opening and closing the special prize opening 61 (opening / closing plate 62), and a count sensor 64 (both of which are indicated only by reference numerals in FIG. 25). At the bottom of the game area 12 below the big prize opening device 60, there is provided an out port 48 through which the game balls that have flown down the game area 12 and have not won any prize winning devices or winning devices are taken in. Yes. Four winning ports 66 a to 66 d are provided on the left and right sides of the starting winning port 45, the electric starting winning port 46 and the large winning port device 60. In addition, an electric decoration lamp 49 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 25) is attached to the gaming area 12 so that lighting and blinking are controlled according to the gaming state.

  The game realized by various winning devices provided on the game board 4 will be described. The game is launched by a launch device (not shown) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and passes through the launch rail 15 and the guide rail 11. The game ball released to the upper part of the region 12 flows down toward the out port 48 while colliding with the obstacle nail or the like in the game region 12. When a game ball flowing down the game area 12 passes through the left gate or the right gate and is detected by the gate switches 53a and 53b, the normal symbol display 50 displays the variation of the normal symbol (the light emitters are green and red). Lit alternately). The normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 50 stops after a predetermined period of time, and when the display result of the normal symbol at the time of the stop is “winning” (the illuminant is turned off in green), the electric start winning award The 46 open / close blades 47 are opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). On the other hand, when the display result of the normal symbol display 50 is “losing” (the illuminant is red and the lighting is stopped), the open / close wing 47 is not opened, so that the game ball cannot be won at the electric start winning opening 46. However, the start winning opening 45 is in a state where a game ball can be won.

  In addition, when a game ball is won at the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 and the game ball is detected by the start opening sensor 55, the special symbol display 41 can start the variation display of the special symbol. (For example, when the game is not in a big hit game and when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not being displayed), the special symbol display 41 starts displaying the special symbol, and the liquid crystal display 116 displays the decoration. The symbol variation display is started. If the special symbol and decorative symbol change display is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined period, and the special symbol at the time of the stop is a specific display mode (a combination of lighting of multiple light emitters that will be a big hit: jackpot symbol) The decorative symbol stop symbol (the state in which all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped) is also in a specific display mode (the same decorative symbol combination: jackpot symbol), and the control of the “hit game state” is started. That is, the open / close plate 62 of the big prize opening device 60 falls to the front side to open the big prize opening 61 and wins a big prize until there is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10). The mouth 61 is kept open. Then, after the special winning opening 61 is closed by the standing of the opening / closing plate 62, the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) causes the opening / closing plate 62 to fall again to the near side, thereby A control for repeating an open / close cycle (hereinafter also referred to as a round “R”) 15 times is executed.

  In this embodiment, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are controlled to stop in the order of left decorative symbol 80a → right decorative symbol 80c → middle decorative symbol 80b. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a state in which all of the left, middle and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed by starting the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols and stopping the middle decorative symbol 80b. A combination of symbols.

  In addition, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a special display mode (a combination of lighting of a plurality of light emitters that are probable big hits) among the specific display modes, the decorative symbols are also displayed in a special display mode The combination of the same specific symbols: probability variation big hit symbol), and after controlling to the big hit gaming state, the probability of the next big hit gaming state increases (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is 1 / 63.1, probability Except for the fluctuation state, 1 / 315.5). That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probability variation state. In the probability variation state, the control for increasing the probability that the result of the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 50 is “win”, and the result of the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 50 is “hit”. Control for extending the opening time of the opening and closing blades 47 opened based on the control is also performed.

  In addition, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a non-special display result (a combination of lighting of a plurality of illuminants that become a non-probable big hit) among the special display results among the specific display results, the decoration symbol is stopped. The symbol also becomes a non-special display result (the same non-specific symbol combination: non-probable big hit symbol), and after controlling to the big hit gaming state, the special symbol indicator 41 is used a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times). Until the special symbol variation display is executed, the control for increasing the probability that the normal symbol variation display result on the normal symbol display unit 50 is “hit”, and the normal symbol variation display result “ Time-shortening control such as extension control of the opening time of the opening / closing blade 47 that is opened based on the fact that it has been “hit” is executed. In the short time state, the probability of winning the electric start winning slot 46 increases until the special symbol display is executed a predetermined number of times by the special symbol display 41, and the number of executions of the special symbol change display in a predetermined period is increased. Can be increased, so that the player is in an advantageous state. In the probability variation state described above, in addition to the time-shortening control, the probability that the normal symbol variation display result is “hit” on the normal symbol display 50 is increased, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-shortening state. It becomes a state. The normal state is a state other than the probability fluctuation state and the short time state described above.

  FIG. 4 shows the game board 4 in a state where it is disassembled into components. However, since only the components necessary for the description are taken up here, some of the components are omitted as appropriate.

  The effect device of the present embodiment is composed of two units that are divided forward and backward with the game board 4a interposed therebetween. Specifically, the front unit 140 is located on the front side of the game board 4a, and the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a from the front side. Conversely, the rear unit 142 is located on the back side of the game board 4a, and the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a from the back side.

  In the game board 4a, a through hole 144 is formed by punching the plywood material in the thickness direction. The through hole 144 is greatly opened from the center of the game area 12 to a slightly higher range, and the opening shape substantially matches the outer shape of the front unit 140.

  The front unit 140 is formed in such a shape that the second half portion (connecting insertion portion) facing the game board 4a is completely fitted into the through hole 144 when viewed in the front-rear direction. This part is attached to the game board 4a in a state of being fitted in the through hole 144. In the rear half of the front unit 140, the thickness of the front half in the front-rear direction is set to be almost the same as the thickness of the game board 4a. For this reason, when the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a, the half part thereafter is flush with the back surface of the game board 4a (so-called flush state).

  Further, the front unit 140 is formed with a boss 140a that protrudes rearward from the second half portion (insertion connecting portion). A total of three bosses 140a are formed at the upper position of the front unit 140 and two at the lower position (only one is shown in FIG. 4), all of which are game boards through the through holes 144. When inserted from the front side of 4a, it protrudes further rearward from the back side of game board 4a.

  On the other hand, with the front unit 140 attached to the game board 4a, the front half of the front unit 140 protrudes to the front side of the game board 4a. The thickness of the front half portion is set to be substantially the same as that of the guide rail 11 or the front decorative plate 43 (see FIG. 3), for example. For this reason, when the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a, the front half of the front unit 140 projects forward from the board surface in the game area 12, thereby guiding and guiding the flow of the game ball.

  On the other hand, the rear unit 142 on the back side is formed in a substantially flat front surface facing the back surface of the game board 4a, and is attached to the game board 4a with the flat front surface as an attachment surface 142a. When the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a, the attachment surface 142a is in close contact with the back surface of the game board 4a (however, a gap due to manufacturing error or distortion is allowed).

  Further, although the mounting surface 142a is not fitted into the through hole 144, a part of the mounting surface 142a faces the through hole 144. That is, when the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4 a, the attachment surface 142 a partially projects inside the through hole 144 and is exposed to the front side of the game board 4 a through the through hole 144. However, since this exposed part is covered with the front unit 140, it is not directly visible to the player.

  Further, the rear unit 142 has three boss holes 142b corresponding to the bosses 140a of the front unit 140. When the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are attached to the game board 4a from the front and rear, 3 The bosses 140a reach the rear unit 142 through the through holes 144 and are inserted into the corresponding boss holes 142b. In this state, the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are positioned relative to each other.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, a display unit is further attached to the game board 4 from behind the rear unit 142. The display unit is configured as a unit in which the liquid crystal display 116 and the second illumination control board 113 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 25) are integrated, and plays a role of displaying a stunning image on the screen. . When the game board 4 is completed, the screen of the display unit can be viewed from the front side through the through hole 144.

  FIG. 5 shows the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 connected to each other. The front unit 140 plays a role of giving a player a certain visual effect / impact from modeling / decoration applied to the outer surface thereof. In addition, such modeling / decoration of the front unit 140 is coupled with the design of the decorative sheet (cell board) affixed to the front surface of the game board 4a so that the player can clearly recognize the model and game concept of the pachinko machine 1. There is an effect. At the same time, in the present embodiment, the front unit 140 is attached to a substantially central position of the game area 12, so that an effect area in which an effect operation is performed is formed. In the present embodiment, in this effect area, for example, a light emission effect by lighting / flashing of an LED, an image display effect by a liquid crystal display, an operation effect by a movable accessory, and the like are performed.

  Further, the central portion of the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 is opened in a rectangular shape so that the above-described display unit can be visually recognized. Therefore, the display area 42 is formed in this opening portion. In the display area 42, an effect is displayed by displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 116.

  The overall appearance of the front unit 140 is formed with a “monster house” as a motif. The “monster house” here is a building where the characters (comic characters imitating imaginary monsters) that appear in creative stories, for example, are inhabited, and the appearance is Western-style bricks It has become. When the front unit 140 is regarded as a “monster house”, the roof decoration portion 140b corresponding to the roof has a shape that widens toward the left and right. In addition, the roof decoration portion 140b serves to distribute the game balls flowing down from above the game area 12 to the left and right (so-called armor cover).

  A comical character body (monster) 140c is arranged immediately below the roof decoration portion 140b on the left side. The character body (monster) 140c corresponds to the character who becomes the master of the “monster house” in the above story, and is visually designed to imitate a human boy. In terms of design, this character body (monster) 140c looks like a wall that penetrates from the attic and looks into both face and both hands.

  Further, the center of the roof decoration portion 140b swells in a dome roof shape, and a window decoration portion 140d imitating a “roof window” is disposed immediately below the roof decoration portion 140b. The window decoration portion 140d can be easily recognized as a window in appearance by adopting transparent parts. Further, an LED 140l is mounted on an LED board (not shown) at the back of the window decoration part 140d. Therefore, the window decoration part 140d performs a light emission effect by turning on and blinking the LED 140l. The LED board is built in the front unit 140. In the present embodiment, the window decoration portion 140d and the LED 140l function as an effect lamp 44a (see FIG. 3).

  Another spherical guiding member 140e is attached to the front side of the window decoration portion 140d so as to obliquely close the “roof window”. The ball guiding member 140e is arranged so as to be braided together with the other decorative member 140f on the front side of the window decorative portion 140d. Each of the ball guiding member 140e and the decorative member 140f has a three-dimensional pattern with a wood grain on the front surface.

  The left and right side edges of the front unit 140 extend downward so as to surround both sides of the display area 42, and the right edge of the front unit 140 is wider than the left edge. The roof decoration portion 140b extends from the upper portion of the front unit 140 to the left and right side edges, so that the outer edges of the left and right side edges are outside the game area by the roof decoration portion 140b. 12 (not shown in FIG. 5).

  A wall decoration body 140g is attached to the right edge of the front unit 140 along the inside of the roof decoration portion 140b. Further, another wall decoration body 140h is attached to the right edge portion from the upper edge to the right edge of the display area 42, and there is a fixed space between the wall decoration body 140h and the previous wall decoration body 140g. A gap is secured. These wall decorations 140g and 140h are each formed into a shape in which bricks are stacked, and the atmosphere as a “monster house” is created by the formation of these wall decorations 140g and 140h.

  On the other hand, a window decoration portion 141 is formed on the left edge of the front unit 140 so as to be located inside the roof decoration portion 140b. The window decoration portion 141 is a decoration as a “light window” leading to the interior of the “monster house”.

  On the right edge of the front unit 140, a sphere guide passage 148 is formed in the space between the wall decorations 140g and 140h. The ball guide passage 148 extends downward from the upper side of the display area 42 so as to bypass the right side, and is opened toward the game area 12 below. During the game by the pachinko machine 1, the game ball that has flowed down from above the front unit 140 is guided by the ball guide member 140e and sent into the ball guide passage 148.

  A wall surface member 140 i is attached to the right edge of the front unit 140 at a position behind the ball guide passage 148 as viewed from the front side. The wall member 140i is light transmissive by employing transparent parts (plate-like members), and an LED 140m is mounted on an LED substrate (not shown) at a position behind the wall member 140i. For this reason, in the ball guide passage 148, a light emission effect by lighting / flashing of the LED 140m is performed similarly to the window decoration portion 140d described above. In the present embodiment, the wall surface member 140i and the LED 140m function as an effect lamp 44b (see FIG. 3).

  Although not shown in detail in FIG. 5, the wall surface member 140i has a light diffusion lens cut (for example, prism cut, diamond cut, etc.) on the back surface thereof. On the other hand, the front surface of the wall surface member 140i is processed into a shape having visual uniformity with the surface shape of the wall decorations 140g and 140h. Specifically, since the wall decorations 140g and 140h have a shape in which bricks are stacked, protrusions simulating each brick are also formed on the front surface of the wall surface member 140i.

  The shape, function, and the like of the ball guide passage 148 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  A ball receiving stage 140j is formed at the lower edge of the front unit 140. In the present embodiment, not only the front unit 140 but also a ball receiving stage 142c is formed at the lower edge of the rear unit 142, and both the ball receiving stages are combined in a state where the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are combined. 140j and 142c are integrated. The ball receiving stages 140j, 142c are divided into upper, middle, and lower three stages. Of these, the upper and middle ball receiving stages 142c are formed in the rear unit 142, and the lower ball receiving stage 140j is formed in the front unit 140. Yes. Among these, the upper ball receiving stage 142c is located at the innermost position, and the position is lowered in this order from the middle ball receiving stage 142c to the lower ball receiving stage 140j.

  In relation to the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j, the rear unit 142 is formed with a guide passage 142d. The guide passage 142d is lowered from the center position of the upper and middle ball receiving stages 142c, and to the front side. It bends and extends. Further, the front unit 140 is formed with a discharge port 140k of the guide passage 142d at the center position of the lower edge thereof.

  The functions of the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j and the guide passage 142d are substantially the same as those known. That is, the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j roll the game ball so as to swing left and right on the upper surface thereof, and the destination of the game ball cannot be predicted. In this process, the game ball falls to the lower stage or is inserted into the guide passage 142d, so that the game is interesting by the movement of the game ball in the meantime. When the game ball is inserted into the guide passage 142d, it is released directly from the lower discharge port 140k, so that it becomes easy to win the start winning port 45 and the electric start winning port 46 (see FIG. 3).

  Although not shown in detail in FIG. 5, a warp passage is formed in the front unit 140 in relation to the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j. The warp passages are respectively formed on the left and right side edges of the front unit 140, and both play a role of guiding the game ball to the ball receiving stage 142c. In this embodiment, the form and arrangement of the warp passage are different on the left and right, and the specific form, arrangement, etc. will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  FIG. 6 shows the outer shape of the rear unit 142 in detail. Unlike the front unit 140, most of the rear unit 142 is hidden behind the game board 4a. However, since the part of the ball receiving stage 142c and the part surrounding the display area 42 are exposed to the front side and directly touch the player's eyes, there are decorations similar to the front unit 140. Has been.

  First, a decoration member 142e is disposed above and above the upper ball receiving stage 142c, and this decoration member 142e extends to the left and right so as to define the lower edge of the display area 42. . In addition, the decorative member 142e is formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in a horizontal row, so that the decoration and the visual unity of the front unit 140 are maintained. The decorative member 142e is divided into left and right portions with the guide passage 142d.

  In addition, a decoration member 142f is also disposed on the left portion of the upper edge of the display area 42. The decorative member 142f is also formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in a horizontal row when viewed from the front, but is further formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in the depth direction.

  With respect to the other periphery of the display area 42, the same decoration (decoration simulating the arrangement of bricks) is applied to the right position of the decoration member 142f, and the same decoration is applied to the right edge. ing. On the other hand, the left edge of the display area 42 is slightly different from the others and is decorated like a wooden door. Such a decoration of the rear unit 142 is not so conspicuous because it is located just behind the front unit 140 when viewed from the front, but the player changes the direction and angle of the line of sight to change the display area 42. If the periphery is looked into, the decoration of the rear unit 142 is clearly visible. The decoration of the rear unit 142 will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Next, an operation mechanism that is a central element in the rear unit 142 will be described.

  As shown by a broken line in FIG. 6, the rear unit 142 has built-in performance action bodies that can appear and disappear in the display area 42, that is, character bodies 150, 152, and 154. These character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated in the periphery of the display area 42 in a state of being located at the back (inside of the rear unit 142) from the above-described attachment surface 142a. It moves from the position toward the display area 42 and appears on the front side of the display screen.

  The rear unit 142 is provided with three cover members 142g at positions corresponding to the mounting surface 142a. The cover member 142g is made of a transparent (or translucent) resin plate having a thin wall thickness (for example, about 2 mm), and the mounting surface 142a is configured from the front surface of these cover members 142g. In FIG. 6, the outer shapes of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are indicated by broken lines. However, since the cover member 142g has transparency, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 (and their attached mechanisms) are actually used. It is visible through the front side.

  FIG. 7 shows a state where the cover member 142 g is removed from the rear unit 142. The three character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are arranged so as to surround the display area 42, and one character body 150, 152, and 154 are positioned above, on the right side, and on the left side, respectively.

  Each of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is designed in a different form. These character bodies 150, 152, and 154 all resemble some kind of “monster” appearing in a famous mysterious novel, but are visually designed to be deformed. That is, the character body (Franken) 150 located on the right side of the display area 42 is imitating a “Frankenstein monster”, but the expression feels as if it is missing somewhere. The character body (Dracula) 152 located above the display area 42 is similar to the “Vampire Dracula”, but has an impression that it seems somewhat weak from the face. The character body 154 located on the left side of the display area 42 is similar to a “wolf man (man who transforms from a human figure into a wolf)”. Although not shown in detail in FIG. 7, the expression of the character body (wolf man) 154 is mascot-like caress.

  The rear unit 142 is formed with accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160 (standby accommodating portions) corresponding to the three character bodies 150, 152, and 154, respectively. The rear unit 142 has a structure that is entirely covered with the casing 162, and the three accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160 are in a state of being partitioned and formed inside the casing 162.

  The casing 162 has a substantially rectangular outer shape. The front surface of the casing 162 is largely open, but the back surface is closed by a back wall 162a. The outer edge of the casing 162 is surrounded by a side wall 162b, and the side wall 162b is formed so as to rise from the peripheral edge of the back wall 162a to the front surface side. And said accommodating part 156,158,160 is formed inside the side wall 162b in the space before this back wall 162a.

  In the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, the side ends adjacent to the display area 42 are the entrances and exits of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154. The character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be displaced between a state (standby position) accommodated in the accommodation units 156, 158, and 160 and a state (appearance position) that appears on the front side of the display screen. At this time, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 enter and exit through the entrances and exits.

  The rear unit 142 is attached to the back side of the game board 4a, and the front unit 140 is attached to the front side thereof, so that the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated in the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, respectively. When it is in the state, it is hidden behind the front unit 140 and the game board 4a and is not visible from the front.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, shielding members 164, 166, 168 are provided corresponding to the character bodies 150, 152, 154, and these shielding members 164, 166, 168 are accommodated through the display area 42 from the front side. It plays the role of blocking the exposure of the inside of 156. Therefore, as indicated by the solid line in FIG. 7, in the state where the character bodies 150, 152, 154 are accommodated in the accommodating portion 156, the accommodating portions 156, 158 are respectively provided by the corresponding shielding members 164, 166, 168. , 160 are closed.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 7, the shielding members 164, 166, 168 are all displaced toward the display area 42, and the entrances of the corresponding accommodating portions 156, 158, 160 are respectively provided. Can be opened. In this state, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can appear on the front side of the display area 42.

  At this time, with respect to the character bodies 150 and 152 on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42, the respective shielding members 164 and 166 are rotated about the one end portion along the front surface of the display screen, thereby opening the entrance. Further, with respect to the character body 154 on the left side of the display area 42, the entrance / exit is opened by the shielding member 168 pivoting toward the display screen about the vertical axis.

  In addition, the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 are provided with a decoration that is consistent with the decoration on the outer surface of the front unit 140. For example, the shielding members 164 and 166 positioned on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42 are decorated in the same manner as the decorative member 142f, in the form of a brick arrangement. On the other hand, the shielding member 168 located on the left side of the display area 42 is decorated like a wooden door as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the three character bodies 150, 152, and 154 perform the appearing and appearing operations in the display area 42. However, the respective operation ranges are designed not to interfere with each other, or in control. An operation that does not interfere is performed. For example, the character body (wolf man) 154 on the left side of the display area 42 moves linearly to the right from the left end of the display area 42, but the motion range A1 at this time is the other two character bodies. It is designed not to overlap with the operation range A2 of 150 and 152.

  Regarding the character bodies 150 and 152 located on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42, there is a design overlap in the operation range in which the respective shielding members 164 and 166 rotate. However, these character bodies 150 and 152 are controlled so that their movement ranges (angles) B1 and B2 do not interfere with each other during actual movement.

  Next, the details of the operation mechanism for operating the character bodies 150, 152, 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, 168 will be described.

  FIG. 8 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member 164. The motion mechanism including the character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member 164 is unitized in a state of being housed in a box-shaped mechanism box 150a. The mechanism box 150a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodation portion 156 is formed inside the mechanism box 150a in this state.

  The character body (Franken) 150 is composed of a combination of three movable parts, and specifically includes a head part 150b, a left arm part 150c, and a right arm part 150d. These parts 150b, 150c, and 150d are pin-bonded to each other to form a link mechanism, and each corresponds to a section of the link mechanism. In addition, an elevating slider 150e is accommodated in the mechanism box 150a, and this elevating slider 150e also constitutes one action mechanism together with the character body (franken) 150. The elevating slider 150h is supported so as to be movable up and down in the mechanism box 150a.

  The head part 150b of the character body (Franken) 150 is supported by the mechanism box 150a via a fulcrum 150f at a portion corresponding to the chest of the “monster”. A lever 150g extends obliquely downward from this portion, and the head part 150b and the lift slider 150h are joined to each other via the lever 150g.

  The left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d of the character body (Franken) 150 are connected to each other at a portion corresponding to the base of the arm. The left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d operate as a unit on the mechanism without relatively moving. However, the head part 150b is located between the right arm part 150d and the left arm part 150c when viewed in the front-rear direction, and these are housed in the mechanism box 150a so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, an appropriate clearance is secured between the head part 150b, the left arm part 150c, and the right arm part 150d. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the character body (Franken) 150 has a thickness as a whole (which is structurally different from a movable accessory having only one thin plate).

  Although not shown in FIG. 8, the head part 150 b is pin-bonded to the left arm part 150 c and the right arm part 150 d at a portion corresponding to the back of the “monster”. On the other hand, the right arm part 150d is pin-bonded to the shielding member 164 at a portion corresponding to the palm. As a result, a continuous mechanism from the elevating slider 150h to the shielding member 164 via the head part 150b and the right arm part 150d is configured. As a result, the character body (Franken) 150 as a whole has a thickness as well as a two-dimensional visual effect due to a single action, like a movable object having only one thin plate. A visual effect is obtained as if the body (Franken) 150 is displayed three-dimensionally and the image displayed in the display area 42 on the rear side of the character body (Franken) 150 is also given depth.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, a drive motor 150h is attached to the back side of the mechanism box 150a. The character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member 164 can operate using the drive motor 150h as a drive source.

  In the mechanism box 150a, an open hole 150j is formed in the right side wall 150i as seen in FIG. The opening hole 150j opens the space inside the mechanism box 150a to the right side, and can ensure the visibility to the inside. In addition, since the casing 162 of the rear unit 142 is also formed as a whole from transparent resin, even if the mechanism box 152a is housed in the casing 162, the inside thereof can be visually recognized through the opening hole 150j. Yes.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 show an operation example of the character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member 164. The lifting slider 150e is lifted and lowered by power from the driving motor 150h, and the power from the driving motor 150h is transmitted to the lifting slider 150e via a rack and pinion mechanism.

  The raising / lowering operation of the raising / lowering slider 150e is transmitted to the head part 150b via the lever 150g. When the elevating slider 150e is raised, the lever 150g is pulled up accordingly, and thereby the head part 150b rotates around the fulcrum 150f. By the rotation of the head part 150b at this time, a movement in which the character body (Franken) 150, which is just a “monster”, protrudes the head forward is realized. As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, an engaging groove 150k is formed at the lower end of the elevating slider 150e, and the elevating slider 150e and the head part 150b are connected via the engaging groove 150k. It is joined.

  When the head part 150b is further rotated, the movement is transmitted to the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d, and the movement is transmitted to the shielding member 164 with the right arm part 150d as a connecting node. As a result, the shielding member 164 is displaced obliquely from the initial posture (hanging state), so that an operation as if the shielding member 164 was pushed up in the upper left direction is realized. At this time, the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d work as articulated nodes having no fixed fulcrum, so that the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d move in the upper left direction according to the movement of the shielding member 164 and the head part 150b. Become.

  As a result, when the motion mechanism is viewed as a whole, the character body (Franken) 150, which is a “monster”, pushes the shielding member 164 with both hands, and a staging operation is realized as if the face is protruding from that. become. In addition, since the shielding member 164 is decorated to resemble a brick wall, the “monster” has its monster power from the movement of the character body (Franken) 150 at this time, and the “monster house” A visual effect is obtained as if the brick wall was forcibly pushed up.

  FIG. 11 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 166. The motion mechanism including the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 166 is also unitized in a state of being housed in a box-shaped mechanism box 152a. Here, similarly, the mechanism box 152a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodating portion 158 is formed inside the mechanism box 152a in this state.

  The character body (Dracula) 152 is a single component, and a two-system link mechanism is provided in the mechanism box 152a. Of these, one system is for rotating (or swinging) the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 166 as a whole, and the other system is for the character body (Dracula) 152 to be the longitudinal length of the shielding member 166. It is intended to slide in the direction.

  Of the two systems of link mechanisms, the first one system (second link mechanism) includes a main part 152b formed integrally with the shielding member 166, and a character body together with the main part 152b (swing member). A lever 152c for rotating (or swinging) the (dracula) 152 is included. The main part 152b is supported by the mechanism box 152a via a fulcrum 152d, and can swing in the left-right direction around the fulcrum 152d.

  One lever 152c is swingably supported by the mechanism box 152a via a fulcrum 152e. The end of the lever 152c located on the lower side from the fulcrum 152e is joined to the main part 152b. A guide groove 152i is formed at the end of the lever 152c along the longitudinal direction thereof. On the other hand, the main part 152b is provided with an engagement pin (not shown) that protrudes rearward in the front-rear direction. ing. The main part 152b is mechanically connected to the lever 152c by inserting the engaging pin into the guide groove 152i.

  A guide groove 152f is formed along the longitudinal direction on the opposite side, that is, on the end portion located on the upper side from the fulcrum 152e, and the tip of the crank 152g is inserted into the guide groove 152f. . The crank 152g is connected to the output shaft of the drive motor 152h, and can be rotated or rotated by its power.

  The remaining one system (first link mechanism) includes a connecting rod 153a connected to the character body (Dracula) 152 and a lever 153b connected to the connecting rod 153a. The character body (Dracula) 152 is designed in a posture as if “Vampire Dracula” is flying in the sky, and the connecting rod 153a is pinned backward in the flight direction of the character body (Dracula) 152. It is joined.

  On the other hand, the character body (Dracula) 152 is slidably supported with respect to another main part 152b. For this reason, a guide groove 153c is formed along the longitudinal direction of the main part 152b. An engagement pin (not shown) is formed behind the character body (Dracula) 152 when viewed from the front side, and this engagement pin is in a state of being inserted into the guide groove 153c.

  The lever 153b is also formed with a guide groove 153d along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the tip of the crank 153e is inserted into the guide groove 153d. The crank 153e is connected to the output shaft of the drive motor 153f, and can be rotated or rotated by its power.

  As for the character body (Dracula) 152, the entire mechanism box 152a is formed of transparent parts. For this reason, the two-link mechanism has an advantage that the state can be easily confirmed from various directions around the link mechanism.

  FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 show an operation example of the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 166. First, for one system of link mechanism (second link mechanism), when the crank 152g is rotated in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 12) by the power of the drive motor 152h, this causes the lever 152c to move in one direction. It rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. When the lever 150g is rotated, the main part 152b is thereby rotated in one direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 12). As a result, one end portion of the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 166 (FIG. 12). Then, the right end part) rotates downward.

  For the remaining one-system link mechanism (first link mechanism), when the crank 153e is rotated in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 12) by the power of the drive motor 153f, the lever 153b is It rotates in a direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 12). When the lever 153b is rotated, the connecting rod 153a is pushed in one direction (left direction in FIG. 12), so that the character body (Dracula) 152 is moved along the main part 152b in the tip direction (in FIG. 12). Will slide to the lower left).

  As a result, when the movement mechanism is viewed as a whole, the character body (Dracula) 152 as “Vampire Dracula” appears to hang down from the ceiling of “Monster House” together with the shielding member 166, and floats in the air as it is. A directing operation as if it were. Since the image of “Vampire Dracula = Bat” is generally established, the aspect in which the character body (Dracula) 152 imitating “Vampire Dracula” appears from the ceiling as in this embodiment is It is easy for everyone to accept it.

  As is clear from the above description, of the two types of link mechanisms, the link mechanism (first link mechanism) for sliding the character body (Dracula) 152 is a mechanism element including the drive motor 153f. It is understood that the whole is mounted on a separate link mechanism (second link mechanism). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a character body (dracula) 152 is positioned at the left end with the fulcrum 152d of the main part 152b as the center, and a drive motor 153h is positioned at the right end on the opposite side. . For this reason, when the main part 152b swings, the character body (dracula) 152 and the drive motor 153h are balanced in balance, and the stable swing is realized. In particular, the mass of the drive motor 153h also acts as a counterweight when the character body 152 attempts to return from the state in which the character body 152 is displaced downward, so that excessive torque is required to swing the main part 152b. There is an advantage of not.

  FIG. 14 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member 168. Similarly to the above, the operation mechanism including the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member 168 is also unitized in a state of being housed in the box-shaped mechanism box 154a. The mechanism box 154a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodation portion 160 is formed inside the mechanism box 154a in this state.

  The character body (wolf man) 154 is composed of a combination of two movable parts, and specifically includes a main body part 154b and a left arm part 154c. In the mechanism box 154a, a slide block 154d and a push / pull rod 154e are disposed as other mechanism elements. Of these, the slide block 154d extends vertically in the mechanism box 154a, and upper and lower ends thereof are supported so as to be slidable in the lateral direction with respect to the mechanism box 154a. Correspondingly, two guide grooves 154f are formed in the mechanism box 154a, and these guide grooves 154f extend in the lateral direction while being kept parallel to each other.

  One push / pull rod 154e extends in the horizontal direction (rightward in FIG. 14) with the base end fixed to the slide block 154d, and the tip of the push / pull rod 154e reaches slightly outside the mechanism box 154a.

  The main body part 54b of the character body (wolf man) 154 is fixed to one side end (right side end in FIG. 14) of the slide block 154d. Therefore, the movement of the character body (wolf man) 154 in the lateral direction is basically realized by the sliding motion of the slide block 154d. On the other hand, the left arm part 154c is in a state where the left arm part 154c is pin-bonded to the main body part 154b and moves relative to the main body part 154b.

  Further, the upper and lower ends of the shielding member 168 are rotatably supported by the mechanism box 154a. As already explained, the shielding member 168 is decorated like a wooden door, and its movement is the same as that when opening and closing the door. Two engaging pieces 168a and 168b for engaging with the push / pull rod 154e are formed at the upper end of the shielding member 168. The engaging pieces 168a and 168b are formed by the decorative member 142f. It is located above. The engagement pieces 168a and 168b extend in the horizontal direction from the rotation shaft of the shielding member 168. When the mechanism box 154a is viewed from directly above, the two engagement pieces 168a and 168b are opened in a V shape. Are arranged.

  On the other hand, engagement protrusions 154g and 154h are formed at the tip end portion (right end portion in FIG. 14) of the push / pull rod 154e corresponding to the engagement pieces 168a and 168b. As shown in FIG. 14, in a state where the character body (wolf man) 154 is housed in the housing portion 160, two engagement protrusions 154g and 154h are provided between the two engagement pieces 168a and 168b. Both are located. In this state, the engaging protrusion 154h located on the inner side of the accommodating portion 160 (leftward in FIG. 14) abuts on the engaging piece 168b of the shielding member 168, thereby holding the posture of the shielding member 168. At this time, the shielding member 168 is in a state in which the entrance / exit of the housing portion 160 is closed, thereby hiding the presence of the character body (wolf man) 154 located in the housing portion 160.

  In the mechanism box 154a, an open hole 154j is formed in the left side wall 154i as viewed in FIG. The opening hole 154j can open the space inside the mechanism box 154a to the left side and ensure the visibility to the inside.

  FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 show an operation example of the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member 168. The slide block 154d is slid by power from the drive motor 155, and the power from the drive motor 155 is transmitted to the slide block 154d via the crank 155a and the lever 155b. Therefore, the lower end portion of the lever 155b is pin-joined to the mechanism box 154a, while the upper end portion of the lever 155b is slider-joined to the slide block 154d. A guide groove 155c extending in the vertical direction is formed in the slide block 154d, and a pin 155d that fits into the guide groove 155c is formed at the upper end portion of the corresponding lever 155b. The lever 155b is also formed with a guide groove 155e along its longitudinal direction, and the leading end of the crank 155a is inserted into the guide groove 155e.

  Therefore, when the crank 155a is rotated in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 15A) by the power of the drive motor 155, the lever 155e is thereby moved in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 15A). Rotate. When the lever 155e rotates, the slide block 154d is pushed in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A), and as a result, the character body (wolf man) 154 is moved outwardly from the inside of the housing portion 160 (FIG. 15 (a) will slide to the right).

  In conjunction with such sliding of the slide block 154d, the push / pull rod 154e also slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A). Then, the engaging protrusion 154g located at the head in the sliding direction pushes the engaging piece 168a of the shielding member 168, and thereby the shielding member 168 is rotated around the axis.

  The main body part 154b of the character body (wolf man) 154 simply slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A) in accordance with the slide operation of the slide block 154d, but the left arm part 154c slides. The movement that rotates with the movement is added.

  For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 15B, a lever 155f is attached to the back of the left arm part 154c, and this lever 155f extends from the tip of the left arm part 154c to the rear of the main body part 154b. It extends and is joined to the mechanism box 154a by a slider. A guide groove 155g is further formed in the mechanism box 154a, and a slide pin 155h that fits into the guide groove 155g is provided at one end of the lever 155f. The guide groove 155g extends horizontally from one side end (left side end in FIG. 15A) toward the other side end in the mechanism box 154a, and is bent obliquely upward in the middle. Therefore, in a state where the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member 168 are accommodated in the accommodating portion 160 (FIG. 14), the slide block 154d slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A). When starting, the slide pin 155h of the lever 155f does not appear to be displaced in the vertical direction at first, but when the slide operation of the slide block 154d reaches the final stage, the slide pin 155h is guided to the bent portion of the guide groove 155g. Gradually move upward. Thereby, the movement of turning so that the tip of the lever 155f, that is, the tip of the left arm part 154c is lowered, is realized.

  Looking at the above movement as a whole of the motion mechanism, the character body (wolf man) 154 that is a “monster” vigorously pushes open the shielding member 168 that is a “wooden door” and suddenly jumps out of the room. Operation will be realized. On the contrary, when the character body (Dracula) 152 is retracted into the room, the shielding member 168 which is a “wooden door” is closed accordingly, and a natural rendering operation as if the room was shielded is realized.

  In this embodiment, the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled so that the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are not visible to the player, and the appearance position is visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be visually recognized by the player and the stand-by positions that are not visible to the player by controlling the solenoid. You may comprise so that a reciprocating drive may be carried out between positions. Moreover, not only reciprocal driving but also rotational driving may be used. In other words, the driving means and the driving method are not limited as long as the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be moved in and out of the standby position where the player cannot visually recognize the character body 150, 152 and 154.

  FIG. 17 shows a left half ((a) in the drawing) and a right half ((b) in the drawing) in a state where the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are combined. As shown in FIG. 17, when the operation mechanism of the rear unit 142 is in an inoperative state, a character body (wolf man) 154 is formed on the left side of the display area 42 by a shielding member 168 that imitates a “wooden door”. And other operating mechanisms are obscured. On the right side of the display area 42, the character body (Franken) 150 and other motion mechanisms are obscured by a shielding member 164 simulating a “brick wall”. These shielding members 164 and 166 are visually unified in outer surface shape with the outer surface shapes such as the window decoration portion 141 and the wall decoration body 140h of the front unit 140. , 152 is not reminiscent of the existence of any of them, and there is almost no awareness of any device there.

  FIG. 18 shows the entirety of the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 as viewed from a slightly upward angle in a combined state. As shown in FIG. 18, when the operation mechanism of the rear unit 142 is in an inoperative state, a character body (dracula) 152 is provided above the display area 42 by a shielding member 166 simulating a “brick ceiling”. And other operating mechanisms are obscured. Similarly, since the outer surface shape of the shielding member 166 is visually unified with the outer surface shape of the wall decoration 140h of the front unit 140, the player is hardly aware of the existence of the operation mechanism. ing.

  FIG. 19 shows a longitudinal section in the front half of the front unit 140. A portion of the front unit 140 that protrudes from the front surface (board surface) of the game board 4a to the front side includes the roof decoration portion 40b, the ball guide member 140e, the wall decorations 140g and 140h, and the like.

  In FIG. 19, the shape of the sphere guide passage 148 is shown in more detail. In other words, the ball guide passage 148 has an entrance that opens obliquely upward to the left above the front unit 140, and the game ball that has jumped in from there is first guided by the ball guide member 140e and rolls in the lower right direction. To do. As shown in the cross section of FIG. 19, the ball guide member 140e has a cross-sectional shape that is stepped downward along the rolling direction of the game ball, and therefore, the game ball on the ball guide member 140e. Is guided, the rolling speed is first relaxed on the stepped uneven surface.

  On one decorative member 140f, a braking protrusion 141a is formed so as to face the uneven surface of the ball guiding member 140e. The braking protrusion 141a is in a positional relationship where it collides with a game ball rolling on the uneven surface of the ball guiding member 140e in such a manner as to hit it. For this reason, the game ball that has entered the ball guiding passage 148 first collides with the braking protrusion 141a and is decelerated.

  Similarly, a braking protrusion 141b is also formed on the wall decoration body 140g, and when proceeding further from the previous braking protrusion section 141a to the back of the ball guide passage 148, this time, the braking protrusion section 141b of the wall decoration body 140g will play a game. The balls collide relative to each other, and the rolling speed is also reduced here.

  Thereafter, when the game ball further advances in the ball guide passage 148, the game ball rolls while contacting the outer surfaces of the two wall decorations 140g and 140h, and the rolling speed is appropriately reduced in the process. . Further, in the present embodiment, since the uneven surface is also provided on the front surface of the wall surface member 140i, the game ball is not only caused by friction with the uneven surface of the wall surface member 140i but also the two external surfaces of the wall decoration bodies 140g and 140h. Also, braking force is applied. As a result, an appropriate braking force acts on the rolling of the game ball in the ball guide passage 148, and the player can follow the rolling process with his eyes.

  At the right edge of the front unit 140, the warp passage extends obliquely downward to the left through the inside of the front unit 140 (inside the outer surface). A warp inlet 148a is formed at the lower end portion of the ball guide passage 148 so as to open to the wall surface member 140i, and a game ball rolling on the ball guide passage 148 enters the warp passage from the warp inlet 148a. There is.

  Further, a discharge approach 148b is formed on the right edge of the front unit 140, and this discharge approach 148b protrudes from the exit of the warp passage toward the ball receiving stage 142c (not shown in FIG. 19). . The game ball that has passed through the warp passage is discharged to the ball receiving stage 142c through the discharge approach 148b.

  Here, a see-through hole 148c is formed in the wall surface member 140i of the front unit 140, and the see-through hole 148c penetrates the wall surface member 140i in the thickness direction. For this reason, the appearance (part) of the game ball passing through the warp passage is visible to the player through the see-through hole 148c.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the decorative shape of the wall surface member 140i (a shape in which bricks are stacked), see-through holes 148c are formed just at the positions of the gaps between the individual bricks. For this reason, in this embodiment, even if the inside of the warp passage can be visually recognized from the front side by forming the see-through hole 148c, the decorative shape of the front unit 140 is not hindered thereby. Benefits arise.

  In the present embodiment, the gate switch 53 is disposed in the game area 12, but the gate switch 170 may be integrally attached to the left and right side edges of the front unit 140 as shown in FIG. In this case, the gate switch 170 is disposed inside the left and right roof decoration portions 140b. Therefore, a passage guide passage 170a communicating with the gate switch 170 is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b.

  FIG. 20 shows a state where a game ball passes through the right gate switch 170 as an example. Usually, since the gate switch 170 is hidden behind the roof decoration part 140b, it is not visually recognized from the front side. However, the through hole 170b is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b, and the player can partially see the appearance of the game ball passing through the gate switch 170 through the through hole 170b. As a result, it is clear to the player that the normal symbol determination is firmly performed in the pachinko machine 1, so there is no possibility that the player will be suspicious about the presence or absence of the normal symbol determination. Although not shown here, a similar through hole is formed in the left gate switch.

  FIG. 21 shows a cross section of the left edge portion of the front unit 140. Similarly, the gate switch 170 and the passage guide passage 170a are formed inside the roof decoration portion 140b for the left edge portion. Although not shown, a through-hole is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b also on the left edge, so that the state of the game ball passing through the gate switch 170 is visible to the player. A warp passage 172 extending in the vertical direction is formed at the left edge of the front unit 140. The warp passage 172 has a warp inlet 172a at a relatively high position. That is, the warp inlet 172a is formed to open from the roof decoration portion 140b to the upper left, and the game ball that has entered from here rolls as it is to the back side of the roof decoration portion 140b. Although not shown in FIG. 21, a through hole (similar to the passage guide passage 70a) is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b in the vicinity of the warp inlet 172a, so that the game ball is inserted into the warp inlet 172a. The process of rolling forward from there is visible to the player through the through hole.

  Further, when the warp passage 172 is bent from the back side to the back side of the roof decoration portion 140b, the warp passage 172 is bent downward from the roof decoration portion 140b to extend the back side position of the window decoration portion 141 downward. In addition, the warp passage 172 is bent rightward to reach the vicinity of the boundary with the display region 42, and further bent further to the rear side to receive the ball receiving stage 142c (shown in FIG. 21) of the rear unit 142. Not open).

  In this embodiment, a transparent plate (outer surface member) is employed in a portion corresponding to the window glass of the window decoration portion 141, and thereby, a decorative effect that actually imitates a “light window” in the window decoration portion 141. Is emphasized. Further, the transparent plate of the window decoration portion 141 is provided with a semi-permeable film by, for example, aluminum vapor deposition, and the transparent plate of the window decoration portion 141 functions as a so-called magic mirror by the semi-permeable film processing. It has become. Therefore, the window decoration portion 141 does not simply show through the back side, and the one behind it (the rear unit 142 or the character body (wolf man) 154) due to the difference in light reflectance between the front side and the back side. Existence is shielded.

  Therefore, even if the game ball flows down behind the window decoration portion 141 in the process of passing the game ball through the warp passage 172, the state of the game ball is not clearly seen through, but the game ball is played by the semipermeable membrane. Is projected on the front side. For this reason, the player does not see the warp passage 172, the rear unit 142, the character body (wolf man) 154, etc. behind the window decoration portion 141, and the game ball passes through the warp passage 172. Is visible by its contour (projection).

  FIG. 22 shows an overlapping relationship between the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142. Here, in particular, the cover member 142g located on the right side portion of the rear unit 142 will be described.

  As described above, since the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a (not shown in FIG. 22) in a state of being superimposed behind the front unit 140, the cover member 142g is directly visible from the front side. It will never be done. However, at the right edge portion of the front unit 140, the boundary line with the display region 42 is not a straight line due to the shape of the wall decoration body 140h, but has a complicated shape designed in a decorative manner. For this reason, if one side edge part (edge part which prescribes | regulates the boundary with the display area 42) is made into a linear shape, the shape of each other when the front unit 140 is piled up on the front side will be provided. No longer match.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the shape of the one side edge portion of the cover member 142g viewed from the front side and the outer shape of the front unit 140 (the outer shape of the wall decoration body 140h) are mutually matched, so that the cover member 142g is viewed from the front side. Is prevented from being noticed unnaturally.

  FIG. 23 shows the motion mechanism of the character body (Franken) 150 as seen from above. As described above, the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member 164 enter and exit in the lateral direction (indicated by a double-headed arrow W in the drawing) with respect to the housing portion 156, and therefore, one side end (see FIG. 23 is the entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156.

  The cover member 142g is attached so as to close the front opening of the mechanism box 150a. Therefore, when the shielding member 164 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 156, the shielding member 164 is attached to the cover member 142g when viewed from the front side. Covered. At this time, the cover member 142g also functions as a partition that partitions the periphery of the entrance / exit of the housing portion 156.

  On the other hand, the one side edge (the left edge in FIG. 23) of the cover member 142g is formed in an irregular curved shape in accordance with the wall decoration 140h of the front unit 140 as described above (FIG. 23), the outer periphery of the entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156 is partially cut away in the entering direction (right direction in FIG. 23).

  Further, in this embodiment, a notch 156a is formed in the mechanism box 150a around the periphery of the entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156, and the notch 156a is U-shaped in the entry direction (rightward in FIG. 23) from the opening end of the entrance / exit. It extends in a letter shape (refer to (b) in FIG. 8 as appropriate).

  Accordingly, even when the shielding member 164 is housed in the housing portion 156, the shielding member 164 can be gripped from both sides through the notch portion of the cover member 142g and the notch portion 156a of the mechanism box 150a. (The white arrow in FIG. 23). Therefore, even if some trouble occurs in the operation mechanism, the inside of the housing portion 156 can be easily opened by grasping and pulling out the shielding member 164, so that the maintenance and inspection work can be performed quickly and easily. Can be done.

  The above-described configuration of the notch is a suitable example related to maintenance / inspection of the operating mechanism. In addition, the present embodiment has a configuration for smoothing normal movement by the operating mechanism.

  As shown in FIG. 23, a chamfered portion 156b is formed at one side edge (the right edge in FIG. 23) of the cover member 142g. The chamfered portion 156b forms an inclined surface that guides the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member 164 in the entering direction (right direction in FIG. 23), whereby the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member are formed. The operation of 164 (especially the operation when entering the accommodating portion 156) is performed smoothly.

  Although not specifically shown here, the configuration of the chamfered portion is also applied to the accommodating portions 158 and 160 of the other character bodies 152 and 154.

  FIG. 24 shows the lower edge portion of the front unit 140 in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 24A, two light emitting regions 174 are formed on both sides of the discharge port 140k in the lower edge of the front unit 140. In these light emitting regions 174, two light emitting regions 174 are formed. The LED 176 shown in (b) of FIG. 24 is turned on / flashed. In the present embodiment, these four light emitting areas 174 and LEDs 176 function as the special symbol display 41 (see FIG. 3).

  For example, if there is a start prize during a normal game (not in a big hit game) in the pachinko machine 1, a special symbol change display will be triggered by that, and the judgment result (winning result) will be displayed specially. The symbol is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the change display and the stop display at this time are represented by lighting / flashing of the four light emitting areas 174. For example, during the variable display, the light emitting area 174 repeatedly blinks in a constant pattern, and when the fluctuation is stopped, the four light emitting areas 174 are turned on or off to display the determination result. Various patterns can be considered for the display mode, but here, when the determination result is a hit (big hit), all the four light emitting areas 174 are turned on, and any of the cases where the determination is not satisfied (1 to 4). Is turned off.

  Further, below the left and right light emitting areas 174, four lighting areas 178 for performing start hold display are formed. In these lighting regions 178, lighting is performed by the light of the LED 182 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, these four lighting areas 178 and the LED 182 function as the special figure storage lamp 54 (see FIG. 3).

  As shown in FIG. 24 (b), a light guiding member 180 is attached to the lower edge of the front unit 140 so as to be located on the back side of the outer surface thereof. Arranged behind the guide member 180. The LED 176 is mounted on an LED board (not shown), and an LED 182 for start-up hold display is also mounted on the same LED board.

  The light guiding member 180 has a certain depth when viewed from the front side, and the LED substrate is positioned rearward by the depth of the light guiding member 180. The light guiding member 180 is formed with four light guiding paths 180a penetrating the inside thereof in the front-rear direction, and these light guiding paths 180a are formed corresponding to the four LEDs 176, respectively. The light guiding path 180a is opened at the front surface of the light guiding member 180 and communicates directly behind the light emitting region 174.

  The light emitted from the individual LEDs 176 is guided forward through the light guide path 180 a and is irradiated to the front side through the light emitting region 174. A transparent member is fitted in the light emitting area 174, and as a result, the light emitting area 174 is visually recognized as if it is surface emitting as a whole.

  In the present embodiment, since the light guiding member 180 is molded from a dark color resin material, the inner wall of the light guiding path 180a exhibits a relatively high light shielding property, whereby the light from the LED 176 passes from the light guiding path 180a to the surroundings. It is hard to leak. For this reason, since the player can visually recognize that only the light emitting area 174 is clearly lit and blinking, the player can clearly recognize the variation display and stop display modes of the special symbol. There is an advantage.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the shape of the outline of the light emitting region 174 is formed as a decorative shape that imitates a symbol (for example, a symbol representing a figure in which a bat flies). For this reason, lighting / flashing of the light emitting area 174 is difficult to be recognized as a simple point light emitting operation, and it is possible to suggest (or teach, appeal, announce, etc.) to the player that some meaning is included therein. .

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. First, the main substrate 100 and the peripheral substrate 110 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the main board 100 and the peripheral board 110.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the main board 100 includes a main control board 101 and a payout control board 102. The main control board 101 includes a CPU 101a as a central processing unit, a ROM 101b as a read-only memory, and a RAM 101c as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 101a controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a game control program stored in the ROM 101b, and creates a command signal to be transmitted to the peripheral board 110 and the payout control board 102. The RAM 101c temporarily stores various data generated in various processes executed by the main control board 101 and information such as input signals. Note that detection signals from the gate switches 53a and 53b, the start port sensor 55, the count sensor 64, and the like are input to the main control board 101, and the CPU 101a executes processing according to these input detection signals. That is, based on the input detection signal, a drive signal is output to the solenoid 63, the special symbol display 41, the normal symbol display 50, the special symbol storage lamp 54, the general symbol storage lamp 56, and the like. Although not shown, the CPU 101a also outputs a drive signal for the probability variation state lamp 51 described above. Specifically, when a probability change state flag, which will be described later, is set, a drive signal is output to the probability variation state lamp 51 so as to be lit, and the probability variation state lamp 51 is reset based on the reset of the probability change state flag. A drive signal is output to turn off the light.

  The payout control board 102 includes a CPU 102a as a central processing unit, a ROM 102b as a read-only memory, and a RAM 102c as a readable / writable memory. When a detection signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by the start port sensor 55, the count sensor 64, or the like is input to the main control board 101, the game ball is paid out from the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101. An instructing command signal is transmitted. The payout control board 102 processes the command signal received from the main control board 101 and outputs a drive signal to the payout device 103 (payout motor). Thereby, the payout device 103 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal.

  The payout control board 102 is also connected to a launching device 104 having a launching motor that launches a game ball toward the game area 12. Then, based on the operation handle 18 being operated, the launch motor 135 drives the launch motor to launch a game ball. The operation handle 18 has a built-in touch sensor that detects whether or not the player is in contact. The operation handle 18 is operated while detecting that the player is in contact with the touch sensor. Thus, the firing motor 104 can be driven by the firing device 104. Further, an upper pan full switch for detecting that the upper pan 28 is full is provided, and when the detection signal from the upper pan full switch is input, the operation handle 18 cannot be accepted. Control may be performed so that the launching motor 104 cannot drive the firing motor. In this case, it may be controlled so that the operation of the operation handle 18 can be accepted when the detection signal from the upper pan full tank switch is not input.

  The peripheral board 110 includes a sub-integrated board 111, a first lighting control board 112 (described as lighting control board 1 in FIG. 25), and a second lighting control board 113 (showing lighting control board 2 in FIG. 25). And a waveform control board 114. The sub integrated substrate 111 includes a CPU 111a, a ROM 111b, and a RAM 111c. The CPU 111a processes the command signal received from the main control board 101 according to the effect control program stored in the ROM 111b. The RAM 111c temporarily stores information such as various data and input / output signals generated in various processes executed by the sub-integrated board 111. Then, the sub-integrated board 111 processes the command signal received from the main control board 101 and transmits the command signal to the second electrical decoration control board 113, or the side decorative body 33, the first electrical decoration control board 112, and A drive signal is output to the waveform control board 114.

  The first electrical control board 112 and the waveform control board 114 include ROMs 112b and 114b as read-only memories and RAMs 112c and 114c as read / write memories, respectively. The second electrical decoration control board 113 includes a CPU 113a as a central processing unit, a ROM 113b as a read-only memory, and a ROM 113c as a readable / writable memory. The first electrical decoration control board 112 sends drive signals to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamp 44, and the decoration lamp 49 based on the drive signal input from the sub-integrated board 111 a predetermined number of times. Output. The second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the liquid crystal display 116 based on the command signal from the sub integrated board 111. The waveform control board 114 controls the sound wave device 115 (the low-frequency speaker 14 and the speaker 36) based on the command signal from the sub-integrated board 111.

  Next, various control processes executed in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed on the main control board. FIG. 27 is a table showing random numbers updated on the main control board. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing special symbol processing executed on the main control board. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a big hit determination process as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a variation display pattern setting process which is a subroutine of the special symbol variation process. FIG. 31 is a table showing the variation display patterns selected on the main control board. These processes show a part of the processes executed by CPU 101a mounted on main control board 101 at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms) according to the game control program stored in ROM 101b. It is a thing.

  In the start winning process shown in FIG. 26, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 (step S1). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the start port sensor 55. If a detection signal is output from the start port sensor 55, it is determined that a prize has been won (YES). If the detection signal from is not output, it is determined that no winning is made (NO). When it is determined that a game ball has won the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved ball number counter provided in the RAM 101c is smaller than 4, which is the upper limit value. (Step S2). If the reserved ball number counter is less than the upper limit value (YES), the reserved memory storage process is executed (step S3). In the on-hold storage storing process, a process of adding “1” to the on-hold ball number counter, and display data is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 along with the addition of the on-hold ball number counter to turn on the special figure storage lamp 54 ( A process of changing the number of lamps to be turned on and various random numbers (for example, a jackpot determination random number, a probability variation determination random number, a reach determination random number, a variation display pattern random number, etc. described later) are acquired, and the acquired random number value is stored in the RAM 101c. A process of storing in the storage area of the provided start winning memory corresponding to the count value of the held ball counter is performed. If a game ball has not won in the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 in step S1, or if the number of held balls is greater than or equal to the upper limit in step S2, the start is performed without executing the following processing. The winning process is terminated.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 27, various random numbers updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms) by the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101 include a jackpot determination random number, a probability variation determination random number, There are reach determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, and the like. The big hit determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (big hit determination). When it is determined that a big hit gaming state is generated in the big hit determination, the probability variation determination random number is changed to a probability variation state after the big hit gaming state ends based on whether or not it matches a determination value set in a probability variation determination table described later. It is a random number for determining whether or not the probability variation big hit to be controlled is determined (probability variation determination). The reach determination random number is a random number for determining (reach determination) whether or not to make a detachment with a reach mode when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is not generated in the big hit determination. The variation display pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol and the decorative symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 101 are not limited to those described above, and the normal symbol per-determination random number and the big hit determination random number for determining whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is a hit are updated. There is also a random number or the like for determining an initial value of a jackpot determination random number that starts counting when the counter makes one round.

  In the special symbol process shown in FIG. 28, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved ball number counter is 0 (step S11). When the value of the reserved ball number counter is 0, it is determined that the jackpot determination random number is not stored in the RAM 101c, that is, the condition for starting the variable symbol display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not satisfied, and will be described later. The process proceeds to step S15. On the other hand, when the value of the reserved ball number counter is not 0, it is determined that the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is established, and the variable symbol of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is started to be displayed It is determined whether or not the game is possible, that is, whether the game is not in the big hit game, and whether the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not being displayed (step S12). When it is not possible to start the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol), the process proceeds to step S15.

  When it is possible to start the special symbol (decorative symbol) variation display in step S12, a hold memory transfer process is executed (step S13). In the hold memory transfer process, a process of subtracting 1 from the hold ball number counter, and various random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) saved in the save area corresponding to 0 of the hold memory counter among the save areas of the start winning memory provided in the RAM 101c. And the like, and a process of shifting various random numbers stored in the save area of the start winning memory. That is, various random numbers stored in the storage area corresponding to n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) of the reserved ball number counter in the storage area of the start winning memory are stored in the storage area of the start winning memory. The counter is stored in a storage area corresponding to n-1 (n = 0, 1, 2, 3).

  Thereafter, special symbol variation processing (step S14), special symbol variation processing (step S15), information output processing (step S16), and jackpot game processing (step S17) are sequentially executed. In the special symbol variation process (step S14), a jackpot determination process and a variation display pattern setting process, which will be described later, are performed, and variation control of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started based on the variation display pattern determined in the variation display pattern setting process. Then, the process of setting the fluctuation time to the fluctuation timer is performed. In the special symbol variation processing (step S15), when the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 41 is started, the variation time set in the variation timer is monitored, and the variation set in the variation timer is monitored. When the time elapses (the variation timer expires), a process of stopping (determining) the variation display of the specific symbol and the decorative symbol is performed. In the information output process (step S16), a drive signal related to the special symbol variation display determined in the special symbol variation process (step S14) and the special symbol variation process (step S15) is output to the special symbol display 41. Then, a process of transmitting various information related to the decorative symbol variation display to the sub-integrated board 111 is performed. In the big hit game process (step S17), it is determined whether or not a big hit flag, which will be described later, is in an ON state. Then, the control of the big hit gaming state, that is, the control for opening the special winning opening 61 a predetermined number of times is performed.

  In the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 29, first, it is determined whether or not a probability variation state flag set in step S37 described later is in an ON state (step S31). If the probability variation status flag is ON, a probability variation big hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S32). If the probability variation status flag is not ON (if OFF), the non-probability variation big hit determination table is selected. (Not shown) is selected (step S33). In the probabilistic jackpot determination table, 10 determination values among 631 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 630 are set, and the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 1 / 63.1. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot determination table, two determination values are set out of 631 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 630, and the jackpot probability is 1 / 315.5.

  Then, the judgment value set in the probability change jackpot determination table selected in Steps S32 and S33 or the normal time jackpot judgment table matches the jackpot determination random number read in the hold storage transition process in Step S13. Whether or not to make a big hit is determined depending on whether or not to do (step S34). The decision value set in the probability change jackpot determination table selected in Steps S32 and S33 or the normal time jackpot determination table matches the value of the jackpot determination random number read in the hold storage migration process in Step S13. When it is determined that a big hit is made based on the above, after the big hit flag is turned on (step S35), it is determined whether or not the probability big hit is made based on a probability change determination table (not shown) in which predetermined determination values are set. (Step S36). Specifically, whether or not to make a probable big hit based on whether or not the value of the probability variation determination random number read in the hold storage transition process in step S13 matches the determination value set in the probability variation determination table. judge. In this embodiment, the probability variation intrusion rate (the proportion of the big hits as the probability variation big hit) is 2/3, that is, six decision values among nine probability variation determination random numbers from 0 to 8. Is set in the probability variation determination table.

  If it is determined in step S36 that the determination value set in the probability variation determination table and the value of the probability variation determination random number read in the hold storage shift processing in step S13 match, the probability variation state is determined. If it is determined that the flag is in the ON state (however, if the probability variation state flag is already in the ON state, the ON state is continued) (step S37), and that the big hit is not the probability variation big hit (non-probability variable big hit) The probability change state flag is set to the OFF state (however, if the probability change state flag is already OFF, the OFF state is continued) (step S38). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S34 that a big hit is not made (defeated), the process is terminated without executing the following process. Note that the ON / OFF states of the big hit flag and the probability variation state flag are stored in the RAM 101c. In addition, a value of “0” is set when the big hit flag and the probability change state flag are OFF, and a value of “1” is set when the big hit flag and the probability change state flag are ON.

  In the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30, first, as a result of the current variable display, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made, that is, whether or not the big hit flag set in step S36 of the big hit determination process is ON. It discriminate | determines (step S41). If the big hit flag is in the ON state, a big hit hour fluctuation display pattern table (a table in which a fluctuation display pattern marked with a circle in the fluctuation display pattern table shown in FIG. 31 described later is set) is selected ( Step S42). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not in the ON state (if it is in the OFF state), the determination value set in the reach determination table in which the predetermined determination value is set, and the reach determination read in the hold storage transition process in step S13 Whether or not to reach is determined by whether or not the value of the random number matches (step S44). In the reach determination table, the reach probability (reach mode ratio) is 1 / 12.5, that is, two determination values out of 25 reach determination random numbers from 0 to 24 are reach determination. Set in the table.

  If it is determined in step S44 that the reach mode is selected, the variation display pattern table at the time of reach (variation numbers 1 and 2 of the variation display patterns marked with “X” in the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. The table in which the changed display pattern is excluded is selected (step S45), and when it is determined in step S44 that the reach mode is not selected, the change display pattern table at the time of disconnection (the change display pattern table shown in FIG. 31 described later). (The table in which the change display patterns of change numbers 1 and 2 marked with “x” are set) is selected (step S46). From the big hit time fluctuation display pattern table, the reach time fluctuation display pattern table, or the loss time fluctuation display pattern table selected in Steps S42, 45, and 46, the determination values set in these fluctuation display pattern tables and A variable display pattern that matches the value of the random number of the variable display pattern read out in the hold storage transition process in step S13 is determined (step S43).

  The deviation fluctuation display pattern table has a table in which only a fluctuation display pattern of normal fluctuation of fluctuation number 1 described later is set, and a table in which only a fluctuation display pattern of shortening fluctuation of fluctuation number 2 is set, When the time reduction control described above is executed, a table in which only the change display pattern of the short fluctuation of the fluctuation number 2 is set is selected. When the time reduction control is not executed, the normal fluctuation of the fluctuation number 1 is changed. A table in which only the variable display pattern is set is selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, by determining one of the variable display patterns set in the variable display pattern table in step S45, a reach such as a super reach effect and a super reach development effect, which will be described later, is achieved. It is decided whether or not to perform the production. For example, a random number for determining whether or not to perform the reach production such as the super reach production or the super reach development production is provided. When it is decided to perform the reach effect, the variable display pattern table in which the variable display pattern for performing the reach effect is selected is selected, and any one of the variable display pattern table and the variable display pattern random number is selected based on the variable display pattern table. Such a variable display pattern may be determined.

  Next, the variable display pattern command is set as a display command for designating the variable display pattern determined in step S43 (step S47). By setting the variable display pattern command in step S47, it is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process (step S16). Further, when the variable display pattern command is output to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process (step S16), a drive signal is output to the special symbol display 41 to start the special symbol variable display. The sub-integrated board 111 executes a symbol setting process (step S102) and a notice selection process (step S103), which will be described later, based on the fact that the variable display pattern has been received. Information indicating the result (for example, the type of notice effect, the type of variable display pattern, the stop symbol) is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 and the command is received by the second electrical control board 113 In addition, the CPU 113a performs control to start the decorative symbol variation display.

  Although not shown, when the variable display pattern is determined in step S43, a process of setting a variable time set according to the determined variable display pattern in a variable timer provided in the RAM 101c mounted on the main control board 101. Is also done. This variation timer starts when a variation pattern command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process (step S16), and a special symbol indicator is displayed when the variation timer times out in the special symbol variation processing (step S15). A drive signal is output to 41 to stop the special symbol variation display, and a display command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 to instruct the decorative symbol variation display stop. The sub-integrated board 111 transmits the display command to the second electrical control board 113 based on the reception of the display command instructing to stop the decorative display of the decorative symbols, and the second electrical control board 113. When the display command is received, the CPU 113a controls to stop and display the decorative symbol.

  Further, the CPU 101a checks whether or not the probability variation state flag is set (step S48). When the probability variation state flag is set, the CPU 101a sub-integrates the probability variation big hit command, which is a display command indicating that the probability variation big hit is set. It transmits to the board | substrate 111 (step S49). As a result, it is possible to make the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111 recognize that it is a probable big hit.

  The variable display pattern selected in steps S42, 45, and 46 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the display command is 2-byte data transmitted from the main control board 101 to the sub-integrated board 111, and the special symbol display 41 starts the special symbol variation display after starting the special symbol display. Includes data for specifying the variation time and reach production until the variation display is stopped (from the start of the variation display of the decoration symbol in the display area 42 until the variation display of the decoration symbol is stopped). It is.

  However, the display command is basically an effect in which the notice effect is determined by the sub-integrated board 111 and does not include data related to the notice effect, but the notice effect is specified only when the spotlight notice is performed. Data to be included. That is, only the spotlight notice in the notice effect is determined by the main control board 101. Note that the spotlight notice may not be determined by the main control board 101 but may be determined by the sub-integrated board 111, for example, by setting it in the lightning notice table as one of the lightning notice patterns described later.

  In addition, the display device is provided with a plurality of display areas, the symbols are variably displayed in each display area, and the display is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode when it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination process described above. In the case of having a plurality of lines, when a symbol that has not been stopped on any display line stops at a predetermined symbol, the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display line becomes a specific display mode, or A state in which all symbols are variably displayed in a combination such that all the symbols are in a specific display mode on any display line is called a reach mode. In this embodiment, there is only one display line, and the combination of any two of the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 is the same. A state in which the symbols are stopped and the remaining decorative symbols are variably displayed, or all the decorative symbols displayed in the display area 42 are variably displayed in synchronization with the same symbol combination (for example, The state in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are always variably displayed in synchronism so as to always have the same design) is referred to as a reach mode. After the reach mode, the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the liquid crystal display 116 are displayed. An effect executed by the sound wave device 115 or the like (for example, the effect lamps 44a and 44b are turned on and blinking in a predetermined manner, a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 116, and a predetermined sound output is output on the sound wave device 115). That switch production.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol display 41 is stopped and displayed after the lapse of a predetermined period corresponding to the variation display pattern. That is, the reach pattern is not formed in the special symbol display 41. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is referred to as a reach mode, it indicates that the decorative design of the display area 42 has reached the reach mode. Further, the CPU 101a mounted on the main control board 101 displays the decoration symbol of the display area 42 when the big hit determination random number does not become a win value in the big hit determination process described above when the special symbol variation display is started. A process (reach determination process) for determining whether or not the reach mode is set is executed. A variation display pattern corresponding to the determination result is selected, and a display command (variation display pattern command) indicating the variation display pattern is transmitted to the sub-integrated substrate 111.

  The “normal fluctuation” with the fluctuation number 1 is a fluctuation display pattern without a reach mode. The “shortening variation” of the variation number 2 is that the value of the reserved ball number counter indicating the stored number of jackpot determination random numbers extracted based on the detection by the start port sensor 55 is the upper limit value, the probability variation state, the time reduction state A variation display pattern that can be selected when any one of the above conditions is satisfied, and is a variation display pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shorter than the “normal variation”. The “normal reach” of the variation numbers 3 and 4 is a variation display pattern that does not perform reach effects such as a super reach effect and a super reach development effect after the reach aspect is formed.

  Further, “wolf man reach” with variation numbers 5 and 6, “Dracula reach” with variation numbers 11 and 12, and “Franken reach” with variation numbers 17 and 18 are defined after each reach has been formed. Fluctuation display for performing a super reach effect executed by image display control (for example, in “Wolf Man Reach”, an effect executed by image display control in which a wolf man in the form of a human being is good at cooking a decorative design) It is a pattern. Further, “wolf man reach development” with variation numbers 7 and 8, “Dracula reach development” with variation numbers 13 and 14, and “Franken reach development” with variation numbers 17 and 18 are executed by image display control of each character. Super Reach Development directed by these characters (for example, in “Wolf Man Reach Development”, the wolf man transformed from a human figure into a wolf, and a wolf man in the form of a wolf. However, it is a variable display pattern in which image display is controlled by continuing the effect of dynamically cooking a decorative pattern with a specialty dish.

  “Wolf man reach-monster” with variation numbers 9 and 10, “Dracula reach-monster” with variation numbers 15 and 16, and “Franken reach-monster” with variation numbers 21 and 22 Unlike the super reach development effect corresponding to these characters, the super reach development effect executed by the image display control of the character image 70 imitating a monster is performed after performing the super reach effect executed by the image display control of This is a variable display pattern that is performed continuously.

  In addition, the “spotlight notice” of the variation numbers 23 to 31 is a super-reach effect after performing a notice effect for notifying that a super-reach development effect corresponding to each character is performed before the reach mode is formed. This is a variable display pattern for performing a super reach development effect according to a character whose image display is controlled by a notice effect without executing the. Further, the “actual reach” of the variation numbers 32 and 33 means that the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 built in the rear unit 142 described above after the reach form is formed. It is a change display pattern which performs reach production by driving control.

  The “full rotation reach” of the fluctuation number 34 is a fluctuation display pattern that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a win value in the big hit determination process described later, and the left displayed in the display area 42. -A variable display pattern in which the decorative patterns on the middle and right are fluctuated in synchronism with the same combination of symbols, and a stop effect is displayed with either one of the probable big hit symbol or the non-probable big hit symbol. It is. The “super reach branch premier” with a variable number 35 is a variable display pattern that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a win value in the big hit determination process described later. Is a variable display pattern for deriving which super-reach effect (or super-reach development effect) is performed among a plurality of types of super-reach effects in a manner different from the super-reach branch effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, there is a variable display pattern that can be selected according to the determination result of the jackpot determination process and the reach determination process described above (one of the jackpots, the detachment with the reach mode, or the detachment without the reach mode). A plurality of set variation display pattern tables (not shown) are set. For example, all random numbers are assigned to the variable number 1 in the table selected when the above-mentioned time-shortening control is not executed, among the variation display pattern tables at the time of loss, which are selected when the loss is not accompanied by the reach mode. All random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 2 in the table selected when the time-shortening control is executed among the deviation fluctuation display pattern tables. The CPU 101a selects the variable display pattern table corresponding to the determination result of the big hit determination process and the reach determination process in steps S42, 45, and 46 of the variable display pattern setting process, and one variable display random number is allocated. The variable display pattern is determined in step S43. Note that the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 31, 34, and 35 are variation display patterns that can be selected only when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and when an effect is performed according to these variation display patterns, Since the player can grasp that the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a jackpot symbol (the jackpot is confirmed), it is possible to improve the interest of the player when these variation display patterns are executed.

  Next, a decorative design that is variably displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the form of a decorative design.

  In this embodiment, ten kinds of symbols “0” to “9” are used as decorative symbols. In addition, the decorative symbol is composed of a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol, and the decorative symbol is “1”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6” shown in FIG. , “7”, “9” are specified symbols, and three types of “0”, “2”, “8” shown in FIG. 32B are non-specific symbols. It is stored in the ROM 113b of the control board 113.

  When the big hit determination random number is a winning value in the big hit determination processing described above and the probability variation determination random number is a probability variation value, that is, when the probability variation big hit is made, the CPU 113a performs the symbol setting processing (step S102). The same combination of specific symbols is selected as the stop symbol (probability variation big hit symbol) for the left, middle and right decorative symbols, the big hit judgment random number is the winning value in the big hit judgment processing described later, and the probability variation judgment random number is probable. If the value is not a value, that is, if a non-probable big hit (normal big hit) is used, the CPU 113a uses the symbol setting process (step S102) to stop the same non-specific symbol for the left, middle and right decorative symbols (non-probable change). Selected as a jackpot symbol). The CPU 113a stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols selected as the stopped symbols in the symbol setting process (step S102) when a predetermined period has elapsed after executing the variable display of the decorative symbols in the display area 42.

  The ratio of the specific symbol to the total number of decorative symbols (7/10 in this example) is determined that the probability variation determination random number is a probability variation value when the jackpot determination random number is a winning value in the jackpot determination processing described later. This is different from the probability variation rush rate (2/3 in this example). That is, in this embodiment, the probability variation entry rate is two-thirds, but the decorative symbol that can be a probability variation symbol, that is, the proportion of the specific symbol is seven tenths, the proportion of the specific symbol and the probability variation There is no one-to-one correspondence with the rush rate. Thus, by making the ratio of the specific symbol displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 higher than the probability variation rush rate, it is possible to make it appear as if the probability variation rush rate is higher than the actual probability variation rush rate. The expectation that the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and the probability variation jackpot is achieved can be improved. Note that the probability variation rush rate may not be 2/3, and the ratio of the specific symbol and the probability variation rush rate may be matched.

  In addition, the left and right decorative symbols are arranged in the order of “0”, “1”, “2”,..., “9” from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. Liquid crystal with a random pattern different from the order of “0”, “1”, “2”,..., “9”. The display is changed in such a manner as to jump around the center of the display area 42 of the display 116. Further, the color scheme of the decorative symbol is set so that the specific symbol is colored red and the non-specific symbol is colored blue, so that the player can easily identify the specific symbol and the non-specific symbol.

  Moreover, the form of the decorative design is comprised in the aspect with thickness (the inside of a number, a side part) so that various numbers can be visually recognized three-dimensionally. And the various characters (wolf man, Dracula, Franken, Monster-kun, Kai-chan) described above are described inside the numbers in the decorative design, and the background image is described on the side of the numbers. Yes. The color scheme of each character and background image is the same color as the color scheme of the decorative pattern (for example, in the case of a specific symbol, the red color based on the red color of the specific symbol by gradation etc. Image display control is performed so that the recognition of numbers in the decorative design is not hindered.

  Next, the flow of the notice effect and the reach effect that are performed after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol in the display area 42 until all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the notice effect and the reach effect. In the notice effect and the reach effect, a character A (hereinafter referred to as a wolf man), a character B (hereinafter referred to as a Dracula), a character, which are stored in a ROM 113b mounted on the second electrical control board 113. Image display using C (hereinafter referred to as Franken), character D (hereinafter referred to as Monster), and character E (hereinafter referred to as Monster), for example, a character image 70 imitating Monster Character image 71 imitating a wolf man, character image 72 imitating Dracula, character image 73 imitating Franken, character image 74 imitating Kai-chan), mini character A (hereinafter referred to as Hiroshi), mini Character B (hereinafter referred to as Hiroshi sister), Mini Character C (hereinafter referred to as “Oh”) Kami Man (Character A mentioned above), Dracula (Character B mentioned above), Franken (Character C mentioned above is a triplet), Mini Character D (hereinafter referred to as Kaiko-chan (Character E mentioned above)) ) Image display (for example, mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister, three-character mini character image 92 simulating wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and Kai-chan) Character body 154 (a member imitating a wolf man (character A described above)), a character body 152 (a member imitating Dracula (character B described above)), a character body 150 ( Driving Franken (a member imitating the character C described above) There is a case in which control, by directing is carried out.

  Note that the notice effect is an effect for suggesting to the player the possibility of becoming a big hit gaming state, and the expectation level for the big hit gaming state according to the type of the notice effect to be executed (hit expectation degree: The ratio at which the notice effect is executed / the jackpot and the ratio at which the notice effect is executed when it is off are set to be different. In general, when a big hit gaming state is reached, the rate at which the notice effect is executed is controlled to be high, so that the player's expectation can be enhanced by executing the notice effect. In addition, because it is possible to grasp the jackpot expectation level according to the type of the notice effect, it is possible to increase the player's expectation when a notice effect with a high jackpot expectation value is executed, and a notice effect with a low expectation value is executed. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation when a notice effect with a high degree of expectation of the big hit is executed than when it is performed.

  The notice effect in this embodiment is executed before the right decorative symbol 80c is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variable display is started. This increases the player's expectation until the reach form in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped at the same design as the left decorative design 80a is formed, and gives further expectation when the reach form is formed. Even if the right decorative design 80c does not stop at the same design as the left decorative design 80a, it is possible to increase the player's expectation until the notice effect is finished.

  In determining whether or not to execute the notice effect, first, it is determined whether or not the mini character notice is executed as the notice effect. The mini character notice refers to each of the above-described mini characters A to D on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c in the display area 42, and the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c. The display area 42 has a smaller display area than the variable display area, and is smaller than a character that is displayed as an image in the advance notice (to be described later) (small display area with respect to the display area 42). It is a production that appears as However, the wolf man (Character A), Dracula (Character B), and Franken (Character C) do not appear as single characters as in the advanced notice described later, but a three-person combination of these characters. Appear in the form. Then, one of Hiroshi (mini character A), Hiroshi sister (mini character B), three-person group (mini character C), Kai-chan (mini character D), or a combination of these mini characters is controlled by image display control. Make it appear.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice is executed as the notice effect regardless of whether or not the above-described mini character notice is executed. The advanced notice means that each of the above-mentioned characters A to D is visually recognized by a plurality of types of characters by controlling either image display control or drive control of the character bodies 150, 152, 154. In this embodiment, it is controlled to appear in the order of wolf man → Dracula → Franken → Monster-kun. The character displayed by the image display control is controlled not to appear by the character body drive control, and the character appearing by the character body drive control is controlled not to appear by the image display control. For example, when the wolf man is displayed as an image, the character body 154 imitating the wolf man is not driven to appear after the image display of the character image 71 simulating the wolf man.

  When the above-described advanced type notice is executed, it is determined whether or not the intense heat notice is executed as a notice effect. The intense heat notice is executed as a part of the advanced notice, and any one of the characters A to D displayed as an image in the advanced notice is changed to the color scheme of clothing displayed as an image in the normal advance notice. Unlike, it is an effect that appears in the color scheme of clothing based on white. However, when a wolf man is made to appear by this intense heat notice, the character of the wolf man after changing from a human figure to a wolf figure is made to appear, instead of changing the color scheme of clothing. In this way, when the intense heat warning is executed as part of the advanced notice, more attention is paid to the advanced notice that may be executed than the advanced notice. Can be made. Characters with intense heat warnings appear different from the color scheme of clothing displayed in the image of the normal development type notice, but they appear with the color scheme of clothing based on white, but the character has decorations etc. Any difference can be used as long as the player can clearly recognize the difference from the character mode according to the advanced notice.

  In addition, control is performed so that a character with an intense heat notice appears in combination with an advanced notice, that is, an image display of the character determined by the intense heat notice corresponds to an image display of the character determined with the advanced notice. Even if it is determined to execute the intense heat advance notice, control is performed so that the character due to the intense heat advance notice does not appear unless there is a character corresponding to the image display of the character determined by the advanced advance notice. For example, even if it is determined to display an image of Franken whose clothing color has been changed as a notice of intense heat, it is determined that the character body 150 imitating Franken is driven and controlled to appear, If it is determined that the advance notice is to be terminated at an earlier stage, the frankene whose clothing color scheme has been changed will not appear on the image display.

  Further, when the above-described advanced notice is not executed, as a notice effect, a lightning flash notice, which is an image display control that causes lightning lightning (lightning) to run on the dark image and causes the stop display of the decorative symbols to emerge due to lightning, is displayed. The background image (for example, the daytime background image 81 and the night background image 82, which will be described later) displayed at the rear of the decorative pattern is changed (for example, when the daytime background image 81 is displayed in the display area 42, Any of four types of characters (wolf man, Dracula, Franken, Monster) corresponding to the background change notice and image display control to be changed to the background image 82) and the super reach development effect described later, or a variable display As a result, the character (Kyoko-chan) who can only appear when the above-mentioned jackpot symbol (the jackpot is confirmed) climbs in the spotlight. Image display control at a spotlight notice, the determination of whether or not to execute any of the performing of. When these notice effects (lightning flash notice, background change notice, spotlight notice) are executed, blackout effects that display a dark image that darkens the display area 42 for a predetermined time are performed twice.

  When the above-described notice effect is not executed, and when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed after the above-described notice effect is executed, the reach mode (in this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a and the right After the decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed with the same design, the middle decorative design 80b is not stopped and displayed), and the normal reach effect is performed with the reach mode displayed. If it is determined that the super reach production will be performed after executing the normal reach production, the super reach branch production is performed to derive which super reach production is performed from among the multiple types of super reach production. After that, a wolf man reach effect which is an effect executed by the image display control of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, a dracula reach effect which is an effect executed by the image display control of the character image 72 imitating the Dracula, and Any one of the Franken Reach effects, which is an effect executed by the image display control of the character image 73 imitating Franken, is executed.

  In addition, when it is determined to execute a super reach development effect that is continuously executed from the above-described super reach effect (for example, if a wolf man reach effect is performed) Performs one of the Wolf Man Reach Development, Dracula Reach Development, and Franken Reach Development from the production performed in the Super Reach Production. Note that, in the super reach development effect, image display control of the same character as the character whose image display is controlled in the super reach effect is executed. Further, in the super reach development effect, in addition to the effect of controlling the image display of the same character as the super reach effect, the monster-kun reach development effect is an effect executed by the image display control of the character image 70 imitating the monster. May be done.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned spotlight notice is performed, a super reach development effect corresponding to a character whose image display is controlled by the spotlight notice (normal reach effect, super reach branch effect, and super reach effect are not performed ( For example, when the display of the monster is controlled by the spotlight notice, the monster-kun reach development effect) is performed.

  In addition, after the display area 42 is darkly displayed as a blackout effect, if neither a lightning flash notice, a background change notice, nor a spotlight notice is performed, the super reach branch effect is passed after a predetermined time has elapsed. In some cases, an effect that is not performed, and an accessory reach effect that is executed by controlling the drive of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 described above may be performed. . Note that there is a case where an accessory reach effect is also performed when the above-described advanced notice is executed.

  In addition, as a reach effect, it is an effect that is not performed when passing through a normal reach effect and a super reach branch effect, and the variable display is synchronized so that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols become the same symbol In some cases, a full-revolution reach effect that stops and displays with a big hit symbol may be performed. The full-reach reach effect uses a combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols as the stop symbol, that is, when the big hit determination random number is a hit value in the big hit determination processing described later because the big hit is determined. It is a reach production that can only be performed.

  Note that the expected degree of jackpot when the above-described reach effect is executed (the ratio at which the reach effect is executed when the jackpot is reached / the ratio at which the reach effect is executed when the jackpot is lost, and ) Normal Reach Production, Wolf Man Reach Production, Dracula Reach Production, Franken Reach Production, Wolf Man Reach Production Production, Dracula Reach Development Production, Franken Reach Development Production, Monster-kun Reach Development Production, Property Reach Production, Full Rotation Reach Production When the reach effect is set so as to increase in the order of and the expectation level for jackpot is high, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol as a result of the reach effect increases.

  Next, various control processes executed by the sub-integrated board 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the effect control process executed on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 35 is a list showing random numbers updated by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a symbol setting process (step S102) which is a subroutine of the effect control process. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a notice selection process (step S103) which is a subroutine of the effect control process. Note that these processes show a part of the processes executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 at a predetermined timing (every 2 ms in this embodiment) in accordance with the effect control program stored in the ROM 111b. It is a thing.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 34, it is determined whether or not a display signal (including a display command) has been received from the main control board 101 (step S101). When receiving the display signal from the main control board 101, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes a command reception interrupt process, and stores the display signal in the command storage area of the RAM 111c. In addition, a reception flag indicating that the display signal has been received is set. In step S101, it is determined whether or not the reception flag is set, and it is determined that the display signal is received when the reception flag is set.

  When it is determined in step S101 that a command (display signal) has been received, symbol setting processing (step S102), notice selection processing (step S103), and sound control processing (step S104), which will be described later, are performed and lamp control is performed. Processing (step S105), symbol variation setting processing (step S106), symbol variation control processing (step S107), jackpot display processing (step S108), and sub information output processing (step S109) are sequentially executed. In the advance notice selection process (step S103), the advanced advance notice selection process, the intense heat advance notice selection process, the lightning notice advance selection process, and the mini character advance notice selection process, which will be described later, are executed, and based on the advance notice pattern determined by these processes. It is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect and which notice effect (notice effect pattern) is to be executed when the notice effect is executed.

  In the lamp control process (step S104), the variable display pattern designated by the variable display pattern command (display command for instructing the variable display pattern) received from the main control board 101 and the selection in the notice selection process (step S103) are selected. Control data for the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49 is selected based on the notice effect that has been made. In the sound control process (step S105), the control data of the sound wave device 115 is selected at the timing when the variation display pattern command is received from the main control board 101.

  In the symbol variation setting process (step S106), the variation display pattern designated by the variation display pattern command (display command for instructing the variation display pattern) received from the main control board 101 and the notice selection process (step S103). The control data of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 is selected based on the selected notice effect, and the variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern specified by the variation display pattern command is set in the variation timer. Start the variable time timer.

  In the symbol variation control process (step S107), a process corresponding to the control data selected in the lamp control process (step S104), the sound control process (step S105), and the symbol variation setting process (step S106) is executed. Monitor the set variation timer. That is, a drive signal is output to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 at a predetermined timing based on the control data, and whether or not the variation timer has timed out. To monitor. The drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155, the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device that are executed when a display command for instructing to stop changing the decorative symbol display is received from the main control board 101. While stopping the drive control of 115, the display command which instruct | indicates the change display stop of a decoration symbol is transmitted to the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113. FIG. The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives the display command for instructing to stop the display of the decorative symbols, and the symbol specified when the sub integrated substrate 111 starts the variable display ( The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at a symbol determined in the symbol setting process (step S102) and instructed when the variable display is started.

  Further, the effect control of the notice effect based on the notice effect pattern determined in the notice selection process (step S103) is also performed in the control process during symbol variation (step S107). In the jackpot display process (step S108), when the special symbol and the decorative symbol stop symbol become a jackpot symbol, the fact that it is a jackpot is displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116, and the effect control during the jackpot gaming state (In this embodiment, display control such as the number of rounds, drive control of drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, effect lamps 44a, 44b, decoration lamp 49, and sound wave device 115) is performed.

  In the sub information output process (step S109), various information relating to the display of the decorative symbol change determined in the symbol change setting process (step S106), the notice effect display determined in the notice selection process (step S103), etc. The process which transmits to the board | substrate 110 (The 1st electrical decoration control board 112, the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113, the waveform control board 114) is performed. Specifically, the drive motor 150h selected based on the change display pattern specified by the change display pattern command received from the main control board 101 and the notice effect selected in the notice selection process (step S103). 152h, 153f, 155, effect lamps 44a, 44b, decoration lamp 49, and a drive signal to the first electrical decoration control board 112 and the waveform control board 114 based on the control data of the sound wave device 115, the drive motor 150h, Operation control of 152h, 153f, 155, lighting / flashing control of the effect lamp 44 and the decoration lamp 49, and sound control of the sound wave device 115 are performed. Furthermore, by transmitting information such as the variable display pattern, the type of notice effect, and the stop symbol to the second electrical decoration control board 113, the variable symbol display is started in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116.

  When the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives information such as a variable display pattern, a type of notice effect, and a stop symbol from the sub-integrated board 111, the CPU 113a displays the information in the display area 42 corresponding to the information. Then, process data describing a process of effect display control to be executed is selected, and control such as a decorative pattern and the above-described character image display is performed based on the contents described in the process data. The stop symbol information is stored in the RAM 113c, and is stored in the RAM 113c when the display command instructing the stop display of the decorative symbol change display transmitted from the main control board 101 via the sub-integrated board 111 is received. The control which stops a decoration symbol with the stop symbol which is being performed is performed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 35, as the various random numbers updated at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 2 ms) by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, a specific symbol random number and a non-specific symbol random number are used. , Out-of-band design random numbers, advanced notice pattern random numbers, intense heat notice pattern random numbers, lightning notice pattern random numbers, mini character notice pattern random numbers, sound determination random numbers, and the like. When the specific symbol random number receives a variation display pattern command that indicates a variation display pattern that is a big hit (a variation display pattern that is marked with a circle in the variation display pattern table shown in FIG. 31), Is received, that is, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined, the probability variation jackpot symbol (combination of the same specific symbol (FIG. 32 (A))) is determined as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42. It is a random number to do. The non-specific symbol random number is a decoration in the display area 42 when the variable display pattern command that is a big hit is received and the probability variable big hit command is not received, that is, when it is determined to be a non-probable big hit. This is a random number for determining a non-probable big hit symbol (combination of the same non-specific symbols (FIG. 32B)) as a symbol stop symbol. The out-of-order design random number indicates an out-of-order without a reach mode and a variable display pattern that is out-of-bound with a reach mode (a variable display pattern marked with “x” in the win of the variable display pattern table shown in FIG. 31). This is a random number for determining the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42 when the variable display pattern command is received.

  The advanced notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the aforementioned advanced notice and determining the advanced notice pattern. The intense heat notification pattern random number is used to determine whether or not to perform the above-described intense heat notification, and is a random number for determining the intense heat notification pattern of the intense heat notification. The lightning warning pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the lightning warning effect described above and determining a lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning effect displayed in the display area 42. The mini character notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned mini character notice and determining the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice. The sound determination random number is a random number for determining the sound output mode during the fluctuation display.

  In the symbol setting process (step S102) shown in FIG. 36, it is determined whether or not the received display signal is a variable display pattern command (step S111). If the variable display pattern command has not been received, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main routine. If the variable display pattern command has been received, it is determined whether or not the variable display pattern designated by the variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern that is a big hit (step S112). If the display pattern is a variable display pattern that is not a big hit (if it is out of reach without reach or out of reach), the left decorative design 80a, the middle decorative design 80b, and right After selecting the decorative symbols 80c (step S118), the process returns to the main routine. Here, the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c are selected so as to be different from each other when they are out of reach without the reach mode, and left decorative symbols 80a when they are out of reach with the reach mode. The right decorative design 80c is the same design, and the middle decorative design 80b is selected to be a different design from the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c.

  If the variation display pattern is a big hit in step S112, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (step S113). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot command is received. If the probability variation jackpot command is received, it is determined that the probability variation jackpot command is received. Determine that there is. If it is not a probabilistic big hit in step S113 (if it is a non-probable big hit), the same non-specific symbol is selected for the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42. (Step S117). If it is a probable big hit, it is determined whether or not a re-lottery effect is performed (step S115). If the re-lottery effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S116. When a re-lottery effect is performed, the same non-specific symbol is selected as the temporary decorative symbol for the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c (step S115), and the decorative symbol is stopped as a decorative symbol in the display area 42. The same specific symbol is selected as the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c (step S116).

  The re-lottery effect means that after the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 41 and the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42 are started, only the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42 is temporarily stopped. This is an effect of stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol in the display area 42 when the variable symbol is displayed again and the special symbol display 41 is stopped. Specifically, after starting the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 41 and the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42, the same non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the display area 42 as a temporary stop symbol of the decoration symbol. After that, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are again displayed in a variably displayed manner, and when the special symbol display on the special symbol indicator 41 is stopped, the same specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area 42 as a decorative symbol stop symbol. It is a production to make.

  In the notice selection process (step S103) shown in FIG. 37, it is determined whether or not the received display signal is a variable display pattern (step S111). If the variable display pattern command has not been received, the process is terminated and the process returns to the main routine. If the variable display pattern command has been received, the advanced notice selection process (step S112), the intense heat notice selection process (step S113), the lightning notice selection process (step S114), and the mini character notice selection process (step S115), which will be described later. Are sequentially executed to select the advanced notice pattern, the intense heat notice pattern, the lightning notice pattern, and the mini character notice pattern, and whether or not to perform the notice effect based on these notice patterns and the notice. In the case of executing an effect, which notice effect (notice pattern) is to be executed is determined in the processing after step S116.

  The advanced notice selection process (step S112) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the advanced notice selection process that is a subroutine of the notice selection process. FIG. 39 is a table showing the daytime background advanced notice pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 40 is a list showing the night background development type advance notice pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 41 is a list display diagram showing an advanced notice pattern.

  In the advanced notice selection process (step S112) shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the daytime background flag is in the ON state (step S131). The daytime background flag is turned on when the background image in the display area 42 is the daytime background image 81, and is turned off when the background image in the display area 42 is the night background image 82. Then, the ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag is switched in lightning bolt notice selection processing (step S114) described later.

  If the day / background flag is in the ON state in step S131, the day / background development type advance notice table (FIG. 39) is selected (step S132). If the day / background flag is not in the ON state (if it is in the OFF state), The night background development type advance notice table (FIG. 40) is selected (step S133). Then, an advanced notice pattern random number is acquired, and one advanced notice pattern is determined from the developed notice pattern set in each advanced notice table based on the value of the obtained advanced notice pattern random number ( Step S134).

  Note that FIG. 39 shows a development notice table for day background, and FIG. 40 shows a development notice table for night background. In these advanced notice tables, 17 kinds of advanced notice pattern numbers 0 to 16 are prepared as the advanced notice patterns of the advanced notice effect. Further, when the advanced notice pattern No. 0 is determined among the advanced notice patterns, the advanced notice effect is not performed. That is, in the advanced notice table, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice effect is to be executed based on the evolved notice pattern random number, and the evolved notice pattern of the developed notice effect is determined. For example, when it is determined that the advanced type notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 are determined, the advanced type notice effect is decided to be executed, and the developed type notice pattern determined as the developed type notice pattern of the developed type notice effect is determined. Decide on the advance notice pattern of numbers A separate random number for determining whether or not to execute the advanced notice effect is provided, and when it is determined that the advanced notice effect is executed based on this random number, the advanced notice pattern number based on the evolved notice pattern random number is determined. You may make it determine in any one of 1-16.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the advanced notice pattern number 1 is an evolved notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a wolf man in the display area 42 when the decorative symbol variation display is started. Pattern No. 2 is an advanced notice pattern in which the drive motor 155 is driven and controlled to start the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, and the character body 154 imitating a wolf man appears in front of the display area.

  The advanced notice pattern No. 3 is an advanced notice pattern in which a wolf man is displayed as an image in the display area 42 when a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a dracula is displayed after a predetermined period of time. The advance notice pattern number 4 displays the image of the wolf man in the display area 42 when starting the variable display of the decorative symbols, and controls the drive motor 152h and the drive motor 153f to drive the dracula after a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern in which a stylized character body 152 appears in front of the display area to perform staged effects.

  In the advanced notice pattern number 5, the character 154 imitating a wolf man appears in the front of the display area by controlling the drive motor 155 when starting the decorative display of the decorative symbols, and after a predetermined period of time, the drive motor 152h In addition, the advance notice pattern No. 6 is an advanced notice pattern in which the character body 152 imitating a dracula is caused to appear in front of the display area by controlling the drive motor 153f to perform staged effects. The image display of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man and the image display of the character image 72 imitating a dracula are sequentially executed in the same manner as the developed notice pattern of pattern number 3, and then Franken is image-displayed after a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern that provides staged effects.

  The advanced notice pattern No. 7 displays the image of Franken without executing the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man and the image display of the character image 72 imitating the dracula when starting the variation display of the decorative symbol. The advance notice pattern No. 8 is a developed advance notice pattern that produces an effect to be displayed. Similar to the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 3, the advance notice pattern No. 8 imitates the image display of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man, Dracula. After the sequential display of the image of the character image 72, the development type of performing a staged effect by causing the character body 150 imitating franken to appear in front of the display area by controlling the drive motor 150h after a predetermined period of time. It is a notice pattern.

  The advanced notice pattern number 9 is an image display of a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, a drive motor 152h capable of operating a character body 152 imitating a dracula, and a drive, similar to the evolved notice pattern of the evolved notice pattern number 4. An advance notice that performs stepwise effects by sequentially controlling the drive of the motor 153f and then controlling the drive motor 150h to cause the character body 150 imitating a franken to appear in front of the display area after a predetermined period of time. The development type advance notice pattern number 10 is a character that imitates the drive control of the drive motor 155 that can operate the character body 154 that imitates the wolf man, and the character that imitates the dracula like the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 5. Drive motor 152h and drive motor 15 capable of operating the body 152 An advanced notice pattern that performs stepwise effects by sequentially controlling the driving of f and then driving the driving motor 150h for a predetermined period to cause the character body 150 imitating a franken to appear in front of the display area. It is.

  The advanced notice pattern number 11 imitated the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, the image display of the character image 72 imitating the dracula, and the franken like the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 6. The advanced notice pattern No. 12 is an advanced notice pattern in which a step-by-step presentation is performed by displaying the image of the monster when the character images 73 are sequentially displayed after a predetermined period of time. The character image 71 imitating a wolf man and the character image 73 imitating Franken are displayed without executing the image display of the character image 72 imitating a wolf man as in the development type advance notice pattern of No. 7. After the execution, a step-by-step effect is displayed by displaying the image of the monster when a predetermined period has elapsed. Is an exhibition type notice patterns.

  The advanced notice pattern number 13 displays the image of the monster when a predetermined period has elapsed after executing the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, like the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 1. The advanced notice pattern No. 14 is an evolutionary notice pattern numbered in stages, and an image display of a character image 71 imitating a wolf man and a dracula are provided in the same way as the evolved notice pattern number 14 of the evolved notice pattern number 8. The image display of the imitated character image 72 and the drive control of the drive motor 150h capable of operating the character object 150 imitating the flanken are sequentially executed, and then a step-by-step effect is obtained by displaying the image of the monster during a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern.

  The advanced notice pattern number 15 is an image display of a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, a drive motor 152h capable of operating a character body 152 imitating a dracula, and a drive, like the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 9. Development that performs stepwise effects by displaying the image of the monster in a predetermined period after sequentially executing drive control of the motor 153f and drive control of the drive motor 150h that can operate the character body 150 imitating Franken. The advance notice pattern number 16 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 10, and the drive control of the drive motor 155 that can operate the character body 154 imitating the wolf man, imitating the dracula. Drive motor 152h capable of operating the character body 152 After sequentially executing the drive control of the dynamic motor 153f and the drive control of the drive motor 150h capable of operating the character body 150 imitating the franken, a step-by-step effect is performed by displaying the image of the monster when a predetermined period has elapsed. This is an advanced notice pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the daytime background advance notice table is acquired in step S134 described above when the display area 42 controls the display of the background image (daytime background image 81) indicating the daytime state. It is a table for determining an advanced notice pattern based on an advanced notice pattern random number. In the daytime background development type advance notice table, the value of the developed type advance notice pattern random number is distributed to seven kinds of advance type advance notice patterns 0 to 6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40, the night background development type advance notice table is acquired in the above-described step S134 when display control of the background image (night background image 82) in the night state is performed in the display area 42. It is a table for determining an advanced notice pattern based on the developed advance notice pattern random number. In the night background development type advance notice table, as in the day background background advance notice table, the seven types of advance notice patterns 0 to 6 corresponding to the variable display patterns are developed. Random values are distributed.

  It should be noted that in the daytime background advance notice table, the above-mentioned advance notice pattern numbers 2 to 16 are developed for the night background only when the reach display pattern is designated as the decorative pattern change display pattern. In the type advance notice table, the determination values are distributed so that the above-described advanced notice pattern numbers 3 to 16 can be selected only when the reach display form is specified as the change display pattern of the decorative design. It has been. When the development type notice pattern with the development type notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 is executed when the variable display pattern that is the reach mode is designated as the variable display pattern of the decoration design, the decoration design pattern is displayed after the effect is executed. The reach mode is displayed.

  Further, in the variable display pattern (variable display patterns of the variable numbers 23 to 31) instructing execution of the “spotlight notification”, only the advanced notification pattern of the above-described advanced notification pattern number 0 can be selected. That is, the determination values are distributed so as not to execute the advanced notice. In addition, in the variable display pattern (variable display patterns of the variable numbers 32 and 33) for instructing the execution of the “actual reach”, any one of the above-described advanced notice patterns of the advanced notice pattern numbers 0, 6, and 7 is used. The determination values are distributed so that is selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the character body 154 imitating a wolf man by the drive control of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 and the Dracula in the night background development type advance notice table than the day background advance type notice table. Developed advance notice pattern (development of advance notice pattern numbers 2, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 16 and 16) that includes the effect of appearing character body 152 imitating character body and character body 150 imitating Franken. The mold notice pattern) is set to be high.

  In addition, since the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is changed by the change of the background image, it is easy for the player to recognize that the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 changes. In this embodiment, when the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are imitated monsters such as a wolf man, Dracula, and Franken, and the background image is displayed as the night background image 82, it is recognized that these characters generally act at night. Improving the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitating the monster being used can give an impression that the monsters start moving at night.

  In this embodiment, the character images 71 to 73 and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitate the same character, but the character image 71 is changed when the background image is changed to the night background image 82. It is possible to more realistically express the state that the character body 150, 152, 154 that actually moves rather than the appearance rate of ~ 73 starts to move, so that the monsters start moving at night. Can be recognized. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, since a character that is generally recognized to act at night is used, the background display is changed to the night background image 82 without explaining the game of the gaming machine in the present invention. The player can easily recognize that the action rate of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 is improved.

  In this embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are executed in the display area 42 in order to appear in front of the display area 42 (player side) so that a part of the display area 42 is covered. It is possible to grasp the driving state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 even when paying attention to the effect. Further, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear in front of the display area 42, a sense of depth can be given, a three-dimensional effect (three-dimensional) can be performed, and the character body suddenly appears in front of you. Can give the impression of appearing. In addition, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are imitated with dimensions larger than the dimensions of the character images 71 to 73 that are display-controlled in the display area 42, the driving state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be further focused. .

  In this embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are normally built in the rear unit 142 and are invisible to the player, and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear. Since it moves to the outside of the rear unit 142 and changes to a state that can be visually recognized by the player, it is possible to give an impression that the character body suddenly appeared, and pay attention to the effect executed in the display area 42. A strong impression can be given to the players.

  Specifically, 2907 judgment values are set in the development type advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 of the daytime background use type advance notice table, and 1094 of these judgment values are developed type advance notice pattern numbers 2 and 4. , 5, 8-10, 14-16. In other words, about 38% of the judgment value assigned to the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the daytime background advance notice table drives or controls one of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155. Is assigned to the advanced notice pattern that causes the corresponding character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear.

  On the other hand, 3164 judgment values are set in the development type notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 in the night background development type notice table, and 2387 of these judgment values are developed type notice pattern numbers 2, 4, 5, and 5. 8 to 10 and 14 to 16 are allocated. In other words, about 75% of the judgment value assigned to the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the night background advanced notice table controls driving of one of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155. Is assigned to the advanced notice pattern that causes the corresponding character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear.

  Further, in the advanced notice effect executed in this embodiment, an effect of causing characters set in a plurality of stages to appear in sequence from a character set in a lower stage toward a character set in a higher stage is executed. . In this embodiment, the wolf man in the lowest stage (Step 1, Step 1 ′), Dracula in the second stage (Step 2, Step 2 ′), and Franken in the third stage (Step 3, Step 3 ′). Monsters are set in the four highest stages (step 4). In the mysterious novel in which these characters appear, the hierarchical relationship (dominance rank) is set in the order of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man, and each stage in the advanced notice production is set to correspond to this hierarchical relationship. The character is set.

  Further, each of the character images 71 to 73 and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 corresponding to each character is set with a big hit expectation degree according to the vertical relationship of Monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf man. In other words, the big hit expectation is set to be higher as the vertical relationship of the character that is finally displayed or appears in the advanced notice effect is increased.

  Specifically, in the above-described daytime background development notice table and night background development notice table, the higher the vertical relationship of the characters that are finally displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation level. Judgment value is assigned to. For example, when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern No. 3 described above is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background, the big hit expectation is about 42% (196 (assigned to the variable display pattern when the big hit is reached). Total number of judgment values) / 471 (total number of judgment values assigned to all variation display patterns) × 100), whereas the development type of the development type notice pattern number 6 described above in the daytime background development type notice table The big hit expectation degree when the notice pattern is executed is about 50% (280/556 × 100). Therefore, if it is a player who has the knowledge about the strange novel in which these characters appear, while being able to specify a stage with a character, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  In this embodiment, a player who does not have knowledge of the strange novel in which the above-mentioned character appears cannot recognize the hierarchical relationship of Monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf Man, but is a player who does not have knowledge of these. Even if it exists, you may use the character which can recognize predetermined order | rank. For example, when performing an effect to compete for weightlifting, the player uses a muscular character, a medium character, and a slim character to give the player a predetermined rank (in this case, a muscular character> It may be configured to be able to recognize (in order of meat character> slim character).

  Further, in this embodiment, as an advance notice effect, an advance notice that the player is visible to the player in order from the wolf man with the lowest vertical relationship among the monster man> Franken> Dracula> wolf man's vertical relationship. There is a pattern and an advanced notice pattern that is visible to the player in order from any character in the vertical relationship of Monster-> Franken> Dracula> Wolf Man Although it is provided, in the advanced notice pattern that is visible to the player in order from the wolf man with the lowest vertical relationship, the player who has more characters visible to the player But the big hit expectation is high.

  Further, at each stage, the character is caused to appear by either one of the character image display in the display area 42 and the drive control of the drive motor capable of operating the character. In this embodiment, when the development type notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 are determined among the development type notice patterns, the development stage of the development type notice effect based on the development type notice pattern random number (that is, up to any stage character). It is determined whether to make the character appear at each stage, ie, the image display of the character in the display area 42 or the drive control of the drive motor capable of operating the character. In addition, the development stage determination random number that determines the development stage of the development-type notice effect and the character mode determination random number that determines the appearance mode of the character in each stage are provided, and the development stage is determined based on the development stage determination random number. At each of the determined stages, either character image display in the display area 42 or drive control of a drive motor capable of operating the character may be determined based on the character mode determination random number. .

  Further, in the above-described daytime background advance notice table and night background advance notice table, than the big hit expectation when the character appearing at each stage is displayed by displaying it in the display area 42, The judgment value is assigned so that the big hit expectation degree when it appears by controlling the drive motor is higher. For example, when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern No. 6 described above (executed step 1, step 2, and step 3 in sequence) is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background, the big hit expectation is about 50%. In contrast to (280/556 × 100), the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 8 described above in the developed background notice table for daytime background (step 1, step 2, and step 3 ′ are sequentially executed). The expectation of jackpot when it is executed is about 66% (94/143 × 100).

  Further, in the character images 71 to 73 corresponding to each character and the character images and character bodies corresponding to the same characters of the character bodies 150, 152 and 154, the jackpot expectation set for the character body is higher. The character body corresponding to each character in the vertical relationship of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man is set to the jackpot expectation set in the character image corresponding to the character one level above. It is set to be substantially the same.

  That is, in the above-mentioned daytime background advance notice table and night background advance notice table, the character is controlled by drive control of the drive motor at a stage ((n-1) stage) lower than the predetermined stage (n stage). The determination value is assigned so that the degree of expectation when the body appears and the degree of expectation when the character body is image-displayed in the display area in a predetermined stage (n stages) are substantially equal. For example, the development type advance notice pattern of the advance type advance notice pattern number 8 described above (step 1, step 2, and step 3 ′ are sequentially executed) in the day type background advance notice table is executed, and the character body 150 imitating Franken is displayed. The expected degree of jackpot when it appears is about 66% (94/143 × 100), and the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 11 described above in the developed notice table for daytime background (Step 1, Step 2, Step 3 and step 4 are executed sequentially), and after the character image imitating Franken is displayed and controlled, the expectation of jackpot when the character image imitating Monster is controlled is about 68% (170/251 × 100 ). Thereby, when the character body 150, 152, 154 appears when the advanced notice effect is executed, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the expected level when the character body appears by the drive control of the drive motor at a stage ((n-1) stage) lower by one stage than the predetermined stage (n stage) and the predetermined stage (n The determination value is assigned so that the expectation when the character body is displayed on the display area in the display step is substantially equal, but one step lower than the predetermined step (n step) ((n-1) ) Stage), the degree of expectation when the character image display control is performed at a predetermined stage (n stages) is one stage lower than the predetermined stage (n stages) (( In the (n-1) stage), a determination value may be assigned so as to be close to the expected level when the character body appears by the drive control of the drive motor. When the character image is displayed and controlled in the predetermined stage (n stage) Expected level of Expectations and, hierarchical relationship does not matter when allowed to appear character body by the drive control of the drive motor in one step lower step ((n-1) step) than floors).

  The intense heat notice selection process (step S113) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing intense heat notice selection processing which is a subroutine of notice selection processing. FIG. 43 is a table showing the intense heat notice pattern selected by the sub-integrated board. FIG. 44 is a list display diagram showing the intense heat notice pattern.

  In the intense heat notice selection process (step S113) shown in FIG. 42, the intense heat notice table (FIG. 43) is selected (step S141). Then, the intense heat announcement pattern random number is acquired, and one intense heat announcement pattern is determined from the intense heat announcement pattern set in the intense heat announcement pattern based on the acquired value of the intense heat announcement pattern random number (step S142). ).

  Note that the intense heat notice table is shown in FIG. In this intense heat notice table, five kinds of intense heat notice pattern numbers 0 to 4 are prepared as intense heat notice patterns of the intense heat notice effect. In addition, when the intense heat notification pattern number 0 is determined among the intense heat notification patterns, the intense heat notification effect is not performed. That is, in the intense heat notice table, whether or not to execute the intense heat notice effect is determined based on the intense heat notice pattern random number, and the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice effect is determined. For example, when it is determined that the intense heat announcement pattern numbers 1 to 4 are executed, it is decided to execute the intense heat announcement effect, and the determined intense heat announcement pattern as the intense heat announcement pattern of the intense heat announcement effect. The number is determined to be a hot fever notice pattern. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect is separately provided, and when it is determined to execute the intense heat notification effect based on this random number, the intense heat notification pattern number based on the intense heat notification pattern random number You may make it determine in any one of 1-4. When the above-described advanced notice is not executed (when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 0 is determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process), the intense heat notice effect is executed. Therefore, the process for determining the intense heat warning pattern based on the intense heat warning pattern random number may not be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 44, the intense heat notice pattern number 1 is an advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern number 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 including an effect of displaying a wolf man in the display area 42 as an image. , 9, 11, 13, 14, 15), the human figure is different from the human wolf man (step 1 of the advanced notice pattern) which is displayed as an image with a normal evolved notice pattern. This is a hot fever notice pattern that displays an image of a wolf man after transforming from a wolf to a wolf, and the fever fever notice pattern number 2 is an advanced notice pattern that includes an effect of displaying a Dracula image in the display area 42 When executing the notice pattern numbers 3, 6, 8, 9, 11, 14), unlike the Dracula (step 2 of the developed notice pattern), which is displayed as an image with a normal evolved notice pattern, Dracula was changed to clothing of the color scheme, which was the color as the base is an intense heat notice pattern to be displayed image.

  The intense heat advance notice pattern number 3 is a normal advance notice when the advanced notice pattern (development notice pattern numbers 6, 7, 11, 12) including an effect of displaying Franken in the display area 42 is executed. Unlike Franken, which is displayed as a pattern (Step 3 of the advanced notice pattern), it is an intense heat notice pattern that displays an image of Franken that has been changed to a color scheme based on white. When executing an advanced notice pattern (development advance notice pattern numbers 11 to 16) including an effect of displaying an image of monster in the display area 42, a monster (development) displayed as a normal advance notice pattern. Unlike the step 4) of the mold notice pattern, this is an intense heat notice pattern that displays an image of a monster who has been changed to a white-based clothing color scheme.

  In addition, although the intense heat warning pattern which displays any one of steps 1 to 4 of the intense heat warning pattern is set as the intense heat warning pattern, the intense heat warning which displays a plurality of steps of the intense heat warning pattern is displayed. A pattern may be set. In this case, when deciding whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect described later, the characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed as images in the advanced notice pattern and the intense heat notice are displayed. The rate of matching with the character determined from the pattern (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the intense heat announcement pattern) is increased, and the intense heat announcement effect is executed over a plurality of stages in the advanced notice effect. It is possible to display a plurality of types of characters based on the intense heat notice pattern.

  Further, as the intense heat announcement pattern, an intense heat announcement pattern for displaying any one of steps 1 to 4 of the intense heat announcement pattern corresponding to steps 1 to 4 of the evolution type announcement pattern is set. An intense heat warning pattern corresponding to pattern steps 1 ′, 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′, which is different from the action of the character body 150, 152, 154 driven by the normal development type warning pattern (character The intense heat warning pattern that drives any of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 may be set by increasing the number of movements of the bodies 150, 152, and 154, or vibrating in small increments. Also in this case, the character body 150, 152, 154 (steps 1 ′, 2 ′, 3 ′, 4 ′ of the advanced notice pattern) driven by the evolved notice pattern and the character object determined from the intense heat notice pattern. It is determined whether or not the intense heat announcement effect is executed depending on whether or not 150, 152, and 154 match, and the intense heat announcement effect that displays any one of steps 1 to 4 of the intense heat announcement pattern is displayed. The same effect can be obtained, and a variety and diversification of intense heat notice effects can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the intense heat notice table is a table for determining the intense heat notice pattern based on the intense heat notice pattern random number acquired in step S142 described above. In the intense heat notice table, the values of the intense heat notice pattern random numbers are allocated to five kinds of intense heat notice patterns 0 to 4 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  In the intense heat notice table, the determination value is set so that the above-mentioned intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 can be selected only when the variable display pattern that reaches the reach is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern. Is distributed. When the variable display pattern that is the reach mode is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern, the development notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 are produced as the development notice pattern described above, and an image is displayed using this development notice pattern. Characters (steps 1, 2 and 3 of the intense heat warning pattern) determined from the displayed characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced warning pattern) and the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 4 , 4) is matched, the presentation of the intense heat warning pattern is executed, and the character different from the color scheme of the clothing displayed in the normal development type warning pattern (however, in step 1 of the intense heat warning pattern) , A character with a different figure instead of a color scheme of clothing) is displayed.

  In addition, among the variation display patterns that reach as the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol, the variation that can be executed only when the reach determination random number becomes the winning value without the big hit determination random number being the winning value in the big hit determining process When a display pattern (variation display patterns of variation numbers 3, 5, 7,..., 21, 32) is designated, the above-described intense heat announcement pattern number 0 or the intense heat announcement pattern numbers 0, 1 Only the pattern can be selected, but the fluctuation display pattern (variation of fluctuation numbers 4, 6, 8,..., 22, 33) that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a win value in the big hit determination processing. When the display pattern) is designated, the above-described intense heat notice patterns 2 to 4 can be selected. In other words, when a character (Dracula, Franken, Monster-kun) that is different from the color of the clothing displayed as an image in the normal advance notice pattern is displayed, it is understood that the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a jackpot symbol. can do.

  Also, in the fluctuation display pattern (variation display patterns of fluctuation numbers 23 to 31) instructing execution of “spotlight notice” and “full rotation reach”, only the intense heat notice pattern No. 0 described above is included. The determination values are assigned so that selection is possible, that is, the intense heat notice is not executed. Further, in the variable display pattern (variable display pattern of the variable number 33) instructing execution of “actual reach, hit”, only the advanced type predictive pattern numbers 0, 6, and 7 are determined as the above-described advanced type predictive pattern. Because the monster character (step 4 of the advanced notice pattern) is not displayed, the variable display that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes the win value in the big hit determination processing Although it is a pattern, the determination value is not distributed so that the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 4 described above is selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, more intense heat is generated than the rate at which the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 (the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect) is selected in the evolved notice pattern. It is set so that the rate at which the intense heat announcement pattern Nos. 1 to 4 of the intense heat announcement pattern numbers (the intense heat announcement pattern for executing the intense heat announcement effect) is selected is reduced in the announcement table.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 which is a big hit is executed, the extension type of advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 16 is developed in the daytime background advance notice table. The ratio at which the notice pattern is selected is {138 (the total number of judgment values assigned to the development type advance notice patterns Nos. 1 to 16) / 233 (the judgment value assigned to all the advance type notice patterns). )} × 100 = about 59%, whereas the ratio of the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 4 selected is {20 (high heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 4) Total number of judgment values assigned to the notice pattern) / 202 (total number of judgment values assigned to all intense heat notice patterns)} × 100 = about 10%. As described above, in order to determine whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect, the characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the evolutionary notification pattern) that are displayed as images and the intense heat notification pattern are displayed. As a step before determining whether or not the characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the intense heat warning pattern) determined from the intense heat warning patterns Nos. 1 to 4 match, By reducing the ratio of selecting the intense heat notification patterns of the heat notification pattern numbers 1 to 4, the probability of executing the intense heat notification effect is reduced.

  The lightning bolt notice selection process (step S114) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing lightning bolt notice selection processing which is a subroutine of notice selection processing. FIG. 46 is a table showing the daylight background lightning notice pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 47 is a table showing the night background lightning warning pattern selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 48 is a list display diagram showing a lightning bolt notice pattern.

  In the lightning bolt notice selection process (step S114) shown in FIG. 45, it is determined whether or not the daytime background flag is ON (step S151). If the daytime background flag is on, the daylight background lightning notice table (FIG. 46) is selected (step S152). If the daytime background flag is not on (if it is off), the night background lightning notice is displayed. A table (FIG. 47) is selected (step S153). Then, a lightning warning pattern random number is acquired, and one lightning warning pattern is determined from the lightning warning pattern set in each lightning warning pattern based on the value of the acquired lightning warning pattern random number (step S154).

  The daylight background lightning notice table is shown in FIG. 46, and the night background lightning notice table is shown in FIG. In these lightning bolt notice tables, seven types of lightning bolt notice pattern numbers 0 to 6 are prepared as lightning bolt notice patterns for lightning notice. In addition, when the lightning warning pattern number 0 is determined in the lightning warning pattern, the lightning warning effect is not performed. That is, in the lightning bolt notice table, it is determined whether or not to execute the lightning bolt warning effect based on the lightning bolt warning pattern random number, and the lightning bolt warning pattern of the lightning bolt warning effect is determined. For example, when the lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 are determined, it is determined to execute the lightning warning effect, and the lightning warning pattern of the determined lightning warning pattern number is used as the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning effect. To decide.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the lightning bolt notice pattern number 1 is a darkened image (such as a decorative design, a background image, a character, etc.) that darkens the display content (for example, a decorative design, a background image, a character, etc.) when the decorative design variation display is started. This is a lightning warning notice pattern that performs an effect (blackout gast effect) that continuously executes the display contents before the blackout effect is performed after performing a blackout effect that controls the display of the dark image 83) for a predetermined time. .

  Lightning bolt notice pattern No. 2 performs the blackout effect once when starting the decorative display of the decorative pattern, and then continuously executes the display content before the blackout effect is performed. It is a lightning notice pattern that performs an effect (blackout gast effect) that performs an out effect and continuously executes the display content before the second blackout effect is performed again.

  The lightning warning pattern number 3 is the same as the lightning warning pattern number 2, and the blackout effect is performed twice. After the second blackout effect is performed, the background image is changed (for example, the background image is described later in the daytime). If it is the background image 81, it is a lightning notice pattern for changing to the night background image 82).

  Lightning notice pattern No. 4 performs a blackout effect once at the start of the decorative display of decorative symbols, and then continuously executes the display content before the blackout effect is performed. During the second blackout production, the lightning flash for running lightning (lightning) on the dark image is controlled in the display area 42, and the left decorative pattern 80a is displayed on the dark image by being illuminated by the lightning. This is a lightning warning pattern that produces an effect of stopping and displaying while floating.

  The lightning warning pattern number 5 performs the lightning warning pattern number 4 and then executes the blackout effect again. During the execution of the blackout effect, the second lightning flash is displayed and controlled. This is a lightning notice pattern that produces an effect of forming a reach by stopping and displaying the right decorative design 80c in the dark image.

  The lightning warning pattern number 6 is a lightning warning pattern that performs a blackout gaze effect (full rotation gaze) as if the full rotation reach effect described above is performed. In this embodiment, when the full rotation reach effect is executed, a special image that can recognize that the full rotation reach effect may be executed is displayed and controlled. In the lightning warning pattern No. 6, after the display control of this special image, the blackout gasse effect which does not execute the full rotation reach effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the daylight background lightning notice table displays the lightning obtained in step S154 described above when the display area 42 controls the display of the background image indicating the state of the daytime (daytime background image 81). It is a table for determining a lightning bolt notice pattern based on a notice pattern random number. In the lightning bolt notice table for the daytime background, the lightning warning pattern random number values are distributed to seven types of lightning warning patterns 0 to 6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the night background lightning warning table is acquired in the above-described step S154 when the background image (night background image 82) in the night state is controlled in the display area 42. Lightning bolt notice pattern This is a table for determining a lightning bolt notice pattern based on random numbers. In the lightning bolt warning table for night background, the lightning bolt warning pattern random number value is assigned to seven types of lightning warning pattern Nos. 0-6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns in the same manner as the lightning bolt warning table for daytime background. It has been.

  In the lightning bolt warning table for the day background and the lightning bolt warning table for the night background, the lightning warning pattern number 4 described above, or only when the variable display pattern that becomes the reach mode is designated as the decorative pattern variable display pattern, or The judgment values are assigned so that the lightning warning pattern No. 5 can be selected. When the lightning warning pattern Nos. 1 to 6 are performed when the variable display pattern that is the reach mode is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern, the decorative pattern reach mode is executed after executing the effect. Is displayed.

  In addition, a fluctuation display pattern (variation display pattern of fluctuation numbers 23 to 31) for instructing execution of “spotlight notice” and a fluctuation display pattern (variation display patterns of fluctuation numbers 32 and 33) for instructing execution of “object reach”. ), The determination values are distributed so that only the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern number 2 described above can be selected. Then, when the lightning warning pattern No. 2 with the lightning warning pattern is performed, the super reach development effect executed by each of the characters described above after the execution of the effect is performed, or the feature-driven feature reach is performed. Production is performed.

  Further, in the variation display pattern (variation display pattern of variation number 34) instructing execution of “full rotation reach”, only the lightning advance notice pattern of the lightning advance notice pattern number 0 can be selected, that is, lightning. The judgment value is distributed so that the notice effect is not executed. In the variable display pattern instructing the execution of “full rotation reach”, after the display control of the special image described above in the display area 42, an effect similar to the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern number 1, that is, An effect of performing display control of the dark image for a predetermined time is performed.

  In this embodiment, the ratio (selection rate) of selecting the lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5 in the lightning warning table for night background is higher than that for the lightning warning table for daytime background. Is set. Specifically, for example, when the variation display pattern of “Wolf man, hit” of the variation number 6 is determined, if it is the lightning warning table for the daytime background, the lightning warning of the lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5 is used. Pattern selection rate is {(numeric width of lightning warning pattern random number of lightning warning pattern number 4) + (numeric width of lightning warning pattern random number of lightning warning pattern number 5) / number of counters of lightning warning pattern random number} = 116/200 However, in the case of the lightning warning table for night background, the selection rate of the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5 is 144/200. This corresponds to the fact that lightning is actually easier to see in the night background than in the daytime background.

  In step S154, it is determined whether to perform the lightning warning effect by determining either the lightning warning table for the daytime background or the lightning warning pattern set in the lightning warning table for the night background. However, for example, a random number for determining whether or not to perform a lightning warning effect may be provided, and after determining to perform a lightning warning effect using this random number, it may be determined as one of the lightning warning patterns for performing a lightning warning effect. .

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lightning warning pattern determined in step S154 is a background change of lightning warning pattern number 3 (step S155). If the background is changed, the ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag is switched (step S156). That is, if it is in the ON state, it is in the OFF state, and if it is in the OFF state, it is in the ON state. If the background does not change, the process returns to the main flow as it is. The ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag is stored in the RAM 113c. In addition, a value of “0” is set when the daytime background flag is OFF, and a value of “1” is set when the daytime background flag is ON.

  The mini character notice selection process (step S115) executed in the notice selection process (step S103) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a mini character notice selection process which is a subroutine of the notice selection process. FIG. 50 is a list showing mini character notice patterns selected on the sub-integrated board. FIG. 51 is a list showing the mini character notice pattern.

  In the mini character notice selection process (step S115) shown in FIG. 49, the mini character notice table (FIG. 50) is selected (step S191). Then, a mini character notice pattern random number is obtained, and one mini character notice pattern is determined from the mini character notice pattern set in the mini character notice table based on the value of the obtained mini character notice pattern random number (step S192).

  A mini character notice table is shown in FIG. In this mini character notice table, 12 types of mini character notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are prepared as mini character notice patterns of the mini character notice effect. Further, when the mini character notice pattern No. 0 is determined among the mini character notice patterns, the mini character notice effect is not performed. That is, in the mini character notice table, it is determined whether or not to execute the mini character notice effect based on the mini character notice pattern random number, and the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice effect is determined. For example, when the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 are determined, it is decided to execute the mini character notice effect, and the mini character notice pattern of the decided mini character notice pattern number as the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice effect is determined. To decide. A random number for determining whether or not to execute the mini character notice effect is separately provided, and when it is determined that the mini character notice effect is executed based on this random number, the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 based on the mini character notice pattern random number are provided. You may make it decide in any of them. Further, a variable display pattern including a mini character notice pattern may be provided, and when the variable display pattern including these mini character notice patterns is determined, a mini character notice effect may be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the mini character notice pattern number 1 is a mini character image representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. 90 is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying an image of 90. The mini character notice pattern number 2 is a Hiroshi sister on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a among the decorative symbols when the decorative pattern variable display is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a mini character image 91 representing the image.

  The mini character notice pattern number 3 is a mini character imitating a wolf man, Dracula, and Franken on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying the image 92. The mini character notice pattern number 4 is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a in the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern variable display is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that performs an effect of displaying a mini character image 93 imitating a child.

  The mini character notice pattern number 5 displays a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. Among the decorative symbols, a mini character warning pattern for performing an effect of displaying a mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a. Mini character warning pattern number 6 is a variation of the decorative symbol. When the display is started, a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative design 80c among the decorative designs, and a mini character image 92 imitating a triple is displayed. It is a mini character notice pattern that performs the production.

  The mini character notice pattern number 7 displays a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. Among the decorative symbols, a mini-character warning pattern for performing an effect of displaying a mini-character image 93 imitating Kai-chan on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a. When the variable display is started, a mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a among the decorative symbols, and the right decorative symbol 80c among the decorative symbols is changed. A mini character notice pattern that provides an effect of displaying a mini character image 92 simulating a trio on the back of the display area It is.

  In addition, the mini character notice pattern number 9 displays a mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol variable display is started. , A mini character notice pattern for performing an effect of displaying a mini character image 91 representing the older sister of Hiroshi. A mini-character image 92 simulating a trio is displayed on the back of the variable display area, and a mini-character image 93 simulating Phantom-chan is displayed on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a among the decorative patterns. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an image display.

  Further, the mini character notice pattern number 11 imitates the mini character image 90 and the triplet representing the Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative patterns when the decorative pattern variable display is started. The mini character image 92 is displayed as an image, and the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister and the mini character image 93 imitating Kai-chan are displayed on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a among the decorative symbols. By doing so, it is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying all mini characters as images.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the mini character notice table is a table for determining the mini character notice pattern based on the mini character notice pattern random number acquired in step S163 described above. In the mini character notice table, the values of the mini character notice pattern random numbers are assigned to 12 kinds of mini character notice patterns of mini character notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  In the mini character notice table, the ratio of selecting the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 (the ratio of executing the mini character notice effect) is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case where the display result is out of place. Judgment values are assigned to. For example, the probability of appearance of a mini character as a mini character notice effect (appearance rate), that is, the probability that the mini character notice patterns of mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 are executed is a normal reach effect (fluctuation display pattern of change number 4) that is a big hit. Is executed, {95 (total number of judgment values assigned to the mini character notice pattern of mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11) / 151 (total number of judgment values assigned to all mini character notice patterns)} X100 = about 63%. Further, when a normal reach effect (variation display pattern with variation number 3) is executed, (81/151) × 100 = about 54%. Therefore, when the mini character notice effect is executed and the mini character is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the display result is a big hit.

  In addition, only when the variable display pattern that reaches the reach is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern, the mini character notice pattern numbers 3, 5, 6, and 6 including the image display of the mini character image 92 simulating the above-described three-person set are displayed. The determination values are distributed so that 8, 10, and 11 can be selected. When the mini character notice pattern Nos. 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 11 are executed when the variable display pattern that is the reach form is designated as the decorative pattern change display pattern, at least a triple set After the mini character image 92 simulating the image is displayed, the reach pattern of the decorative symbols is displayed. In other words, when the mini character image 92 imitating a three-person group is displayed, it can be understood that the decorative symbol variation display becomes a reach mode.

  Further, among the variable display patterns that reach as the decorative display variable display pattern, a variable display pattern (variation numbers 4, 6, and 8 that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a winning value in the big hit determination process. ,..., 22, 35) is designated, the above-mentioned mini character notice pattern 11 can be selected. In other words, when all the mini characters (Hiroshi, Hiroshi sister, trio, and Kai-chan) displayed in the mini character preview are displayed, it is understood that the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a big hit symbol. Can do.

  In the variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable numbers 23 to 34) for instructing execution of “spotlight advance notice”, “actual object reach”, and “full rotation reach”, the mini character of the above-mentioned mini character advance notice pattern number 0 is used. The judgment values are assigned so that only the notice pattern can be selected, that is, the mini character notice is not executed.

  Further, each of the mini character images 90 to 93 corresponding to each character is set with a big hit expectation degree in the order of Kaiko-chan> 3 person group> Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister. That is, when Kaiko-chan is displayed in the mini character notice effect, the highest hit reliability is set.

  Specifically, in the above-described mini character notice table, the determination value is assigned so that the jackpot reliability is the highest when the Kai-chan mini character is displayed. For example, when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 4 (image display of the mini character image 93 imitating Kai-chan) is executed in the mini character notice table, the big hit reliability is 75% (66 (when the big hit is reached) The total number of judgment values assigned to the variable display pattern of No.) / 88 (total number of judgment values assigned to all the fluctuation display patterns) × 100). The jackpot reliability when the displayed minicharacter image 90 or the minicharacter image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister is executed is about 33% (165 (of the judgment value assigned to the variable display pattern when the jackpot is reached) Total number) / 495 (the total number of judgment values assigned to the total variation display pattern) × 100), which is described above. The big hit reliability when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern No. 3 (image display of the mini character image 93 imitating Kai-chan) is executed is about 67% (165 (variable display pattern when the big hit is reached) (The total number of judgment values to be assigned) / 245 (the total number of judgment values to be assigned to all the variation display patterns) × 100). Therefore, when the Kai-chan mini character is displayed, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  In addition, when the mini character of Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the mini character of the trio and Kaiko-chan is displayed, but the mini character of Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister When the mini characters are displayed in combination, the big hit reliability is set to be higher than when the mini characters of Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister are each displayed alone.

  Specifically, the determination value is assigned so that the big hit reliability is high when the mini character of Hiroshi and Hiroshi older sister is displayed in the above-described mini character notice table. For example, when the mini character notice pattern of mini character notice pattern number 5 (mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi and image display of mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister) is executed in the mini character notice table, the big hit reliability is 88. % (44 (total number of determination values allocated to the variable display pattern when the big hit is obtained) / 50 (total number of determination values allocated to all the variable display patterns) × 100). Therefore, since the meaning (big hit reliability) suggested by the mini character differs between the case where the mini character is displayed as a single character and the case where the character is displayed in combination, the case where the character is displayed as a single character. Even if the big hit reliability is low, it does not stop paying attention to Hiroshi, Hiroshi sister's mini character.

  In the notice selection process (step S103), the above-described advanced notice process (step S112), intense heat notice process (step S113), lightning notice process (step S114), and mini character notice process (step S115) are sequentially executed. The process after step S116 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined in these processes and which notice effect (notice pattern) to execute when the notice effect is executed. To decide. As shown in FIG. 37, it is determined whether or not the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 of the advanced notice selection process (step S112) is the evolved notice pattern number 0 (step S116). If it is not the advanced notice pattern number 0 (if it is the evolved notice pattern number 1 to 16), the evolved notice pattern determined in step S134 is set (step S117). By setting the advanced notice pattern in step S117, it is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub-information output process (step S109), and the advanced notice pattern is received by the second electrical control board 113. Sometimes, the CPU 113a controls to start the advanced notice effect. Further, in the sub-information output process (step S109), the advanced notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113, and at the predetermined timing (the advance notice pattern step for causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear is started. At the timing, a drive signal is output to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155, and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the intense heat notice pattern determined in step S142 of the intense heat notice selection process (step S113) is the intense heat notice pattern number 0 (step S118). If the intense heat warning pattern number is not 0 (if the intense heat warning pattern number is 1 to 4), the character displayed as an image in the advanced notice pattern (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced notice pattern) It is determined whether or not the characters (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the intense heat warning pattern) determined from the intense heat warning patterns No. 1 to 4 match (step S119). If the characters match, the intense heat warning pattern determined in step S142 is set (step S120). By setting the intense heat warning pattern in step S120, it is transmitted to the second lighting control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109) together with the advanced warning pattern set in step S120. At 113, the CPU 113a receives the intense heat warning pattern at the predetermined timing of the advanced warning effect that has already been started (the start timing of the step of the advanced warning pattern that causes the matched character to appear). Control to start the notice effect is performed. If the intense heat notice pattern number is 0 in step S118 or if the character does not match in step S119, the process proceeds to step S123.

  In this embodiment, it is determined from the characters (images 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed in the developed notice pattern and the intense notice patterns 1 to 4 in step S119. It is determined whether or not to execute the intense heat notification effect by determining whether or not the character (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the intense heat notification pattern) matches. Here, the rate at which the intense heat announcement effect is executed is set higher in the case of a big hit than in the case where the display result is out of sync.

  For example, the probability that a wolf man with a different appearance will appear as an intense heat announcement effect (appearance rate), that is, the probability that the intense heat announcement pattern No. 1 will be executed, the wolf man reach development effect is executed, In addition, when the variation display pattern of variation number 8 that is a big hit is executed, the intense heat notification pattern of intense heat notification pattern number 1 is executed in the advanced notification pattern numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 11, 13, 14, and 15 when the advanced notice pattern is executed. {90 (Developed notice pattern numbers 1, 3, 4, 6, Total number of judgment values assigned to 8, 9, 11, 13, 14, 15 advanced notice patterns) / 233 (total number of judgment values assigned to all advanced notice patterns)} × {14 Thermal notice pattern The total number of judgment values that are allocated to the intense heat notice patterns of issue 1) / 202 (which is all the total number of evolved notice determination value allocated to the pattern)} × 100 = about 2.7%. In addition, when the same wolf man reach development effect as described above is executed and the change display pattern of change number 7 which is out of place is executed, (104/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about It is 0.44%. Therefore, when a fierce heat notice effect is executed and a character different from the image displayed in the normal advanced notice effect (developed notice effect without executing the fierce heat notice effect) appears, it is displayed to the player. The expectation that the result is a big hit can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the 1-byte execution area in the RAM 111c of the sub-integrated board 111, the intense heat notice pattern random number is updated in a numerical range of 0 to 201. In the 1-byte execution area, the upper limit of the numerical range of random numbers that can be updated is 256 (0 to 255), and the determination is simply made that the intense heat announcement pattern random number is assigned to the intense heat announcement pattern for executing the intense heat announcement effect. When the intense heat announcement effect is executed when the value matches the value, even if the upper limit numerical range is used as the intense heat announcement pattern random number, the lower limit of the probability that the intense heat announcement effect is executed is 1/256 ×. 100 = about 0.39%. On the other hand, in the case where the intense heat advance notice effect is executed only when the specific advanced notice effect is executed, when the evolved pattern random number is updated in the execution area of 1 byte (in this embodiment, Even if the advanced notice pattern random number is updated in the numerical range of 0 to 232, a 1-byte execution area is used), the lower limit of the probability that the intense heat notice effect is executed is (1 / 256) × (1/256) × 100 = about 0.0015%, and the probability that the intense heat notice effect is executed can be sufficiently reduced.

  Specifically, for example, the probability (appearance rate) that a monster with a different color scheme of appearance appears as an intense heat announcement effect, that is, the probability that the intense heat announcement pattern of the intense heat announcement pattern number 4 will be executed is wolf man reach When the development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 which is a big hit is executed, (26/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.11%. Therefore, the intense heat advance notice effect is executed only when a specific advanced notice effect is executed, so that the premier heat that is rarely executed while saving the RAM usage area is saved. A notice effect can be realized.

  In addition, when the intense heat warning effect is executed when the random number of the intense heat warning pattern coincides with the judgment value assigned to the intense heat warning pattern that executes the intense heat warning effect, the hot heat warning effect is regular. (Since the intense heat warning pattern random number is updated every predetermined time, the timing when the intense heat warning pattern random number matches the judgment value, that is, the timing when the intense heat warning effect can be executed. However, the intense heat announcement effect is executed only when a specific advanced notice effect is executed (a character determined from the image displayed in the advanced notice effect and the intense heat notice pattern). Only when they match, the intense heat announcement effect is executed as part of the advanced notice effect). There is a chance the appearance of the data, the game is not to become monotonous, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Also, instead of setting the intense heat warning pattern (the intense heat warning pattern that causes different characters such as the color scheme of the clothes to appear) as a part of the advanced warning effect, When it is configured to be included in the advanced notice pattern, it is necessary to prepare a new advanced notice pattern for each of the advanced notice patterns that can be executed. The amount of data to be stored in the ROM 111b of the sub-integrated board 111, which is the storage area for the advanced notice pattern, becomes enormous. However, an intense heat notice pattern is set separately from the evolved notice pattern, and a specific developed notice effect is produced. By executing the intense heat announcement effect only when the is executed, it is possible to reduce the data amount of all the warning patterns to be stored in the ROM 111b. .

  In addition, an advanced notice pattern in which an advanced notice effect is executed and an intense heat notice pattern in which an intense heat notice effect is executed independently of the advanced notice effect are set, and the intense heat notice effect is executed. Even if it is determined that the advanced notice effect is to be executed, the advanced notice effect is not executed and the intense heat notice effect is preferentially executed. In such a case, the notice effect itself will be changed, and the derivation balance of the advanced notice effect may be impaired. The derivation balance of the advanced notice effect is not impaired by setting the intense heat notice pattern to be executed and causing the intense heat notice effect to be executed as part of the advanced notice effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the probability (appearance rate) that a character different from the character displayed in the advanced notice effect as an intense notice effect will appear as a monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man. It is set differently depending on the situation. That is, as the character's vertical relationship becomes higher, the appearance rate of the character displayed as an intense heat announcement effect is set to be lower.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed when the background image is the daytime background image 81 and the change display pattern of the change number 8 that is a big hit is executed, The appearance rate of different wolf men (probability that the intense heat warning pattern No. 1 will be executed) is (90/233) × (14/202) × 100 = about 2.7%, and the color scheme of clothing Appearance rate of Dracula of different (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern No. 2 is executed) is (66/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.28%, and the color scheme of the clothing Appearance rate of different Franken (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern No. 3 is executed) is (43/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.18%, and the color scheme of the clothing Different monsters Incidence of (probability of intense heat notice patterns of intense heat notice pattern number 4 is executed) has a (26/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.11%.

  Here, the ratio (2/202) determined from each of the intense heat notification patterns of the intense heat notification pattern numbers 2 to 4 to each of the intense heat notification patterns is the same, but as the character's vertical relationship rises, Since the proportion determined as the advanced notice pattern in which the corresponding intense heat notice pattern is executed decreases, the appearance rate of the character displayed as an intense heat notice effect decreases. Therefore, as the character's vertical relationship rises, the character displayed as an intense heat notice effect rarely appears, and the bliss level when a character whose character's vertical relationship is high appears Can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, characters appearing at each stage are displayed on the display area 42 in the daytime background advance notice table and the night background advance notice table. The determination value is assigned so that the expected degree of big hit when it appears by controlling the drive motor is higher than the expected degree of big hit. For this reason, when it is determined that the variation display pattern is a big hit, the rate of appearance of the character is increased by controlling the drive motor, compared to the case where the variation display pattern is determined to be out of order, and in step S154. Characters (images of the advanced notice pattern) that are determined from the pictures displayed by the advanced notice pattern (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced notice pattern) and the intense notice patterns 1 to 4 The rate at which Steps 1, 2, 3, 4) match is low.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the drive motors 150h and 152h are the driving motors 150h and 152h in the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the night background developed notice table than the day background developed notice table. , 153f, and 155, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of the advanced notice pattern that causes the corresponding character body 150, 152, 154 to appear is increased. For this reason, when the background image displayed in the display area 42 is the night background image 82, the ratio of causing the character to appear by displaying the image in the display area 42 is lower than in the case of the daytime background image 81, In step S119, the character displayed by the advanced notice pattern (steps 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the advanced notice pattern) and the character determined from the intense heat notice patterns of the intense heat notice patterns Nos. 1 to 4 (extreme heat) The rate at which the steps 1, 2, 3, 4) of the notice pattern match is reduced.

  As described above, when the background image displayed in the display area 42 is the night background image 82, the corresponding character bodies 150, 152, and 155 are controlled by driving one of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155. When the background image is the daytime background image 81, the character determined from the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 is improved by increasing the rate of appearance of 154, while the background image is the daytime background image 81. The expectation that will be a big hit can be improved by increasing the ratio of appearing. In addition, as described above, when the display pattern is determined to be a big hit, or when the background image is the night background image 82, the character displayed as an intense heat notice effect appears rarely. The bliss when this character appears can be improved.

  In step S116, if the advanced notice pattern determined in step S134 is developed notice pattern number 0, whether or not the lightning notice pattern determined in step S154 of the lightning notice selection process is lightning notice pattern number 0. Is discriminated (step S121). If it is not the lightning warning pattern number 0 (if it is lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6), the lightning warning pattern determined in step S154 is set (step S122). When the lightning warning notice pattern is set in step S122, it is transmitted to the second lighting control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109), and when the lightning warning notice pattern is received by the second lighting control board 113, The CPU 113a controls to start the lightning notice effect. In addition, the sub information output process (step S109) transmits the lightning warning pattern to the second electrical control board 113, and starts displaying lightning based on the predetermined timing (lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5). At a timing, a drive signal is output to the effect lamps 44a and 44b, and the effect lamps 44a and 44b are turned on and blinked.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the mini character notice pattern determined in step S192 of the mini character notice selection process is the mini character notice number 0 (step S123). If the mini character notice pattern number is not 0 (if the mini character notice pattern number is 1 to 11), the mini character notice pattern determined in step S192 is set (step S124). When the mini character notice pattern is set in step S124, it is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub information output process (step S109), and when the mini character notice pattern is received by the second electrical design control board 113, The CPU 113a controls to start the mini character notice effect.

  Next, the sound control process (step S104) executed in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the sound output mode to be output by the sound wave device 115 is determined by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated substrate 111, and a drive signal is output to the sound wave device 115 according to the sound output mode. The ROM 1114b mounted on the waveform control board 114 stores a plurality of types of sound output data, and the ROM 111b mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 stores the ROM 1114b mounted on the waveform control board 114. A signal instructing driving of the sound wave device 115 is provided for each of a plurality of types of sound output data in a one-to-one correspondence.

  In this embodiment, the decorative pattern 80a to 80b is displayed in the display area 42 until the reach mode is formed and the reach effect is started, or the decorative pattern 80a is displayed in the display area 42. A predetermined sound output is executed from the start of the variable display of ˜80b until the display of the symbol is stopped without forming the reach mode. In this embodiment, control is performed so that the sound output mode to be output differs according to the background image. In the ROM 114b mounted on the waveform control board 114, the day background normal sound data indicating the day background normal sound corresponding to the day background image 81 and the night background normal sound data indicating the night background normal sound corresponding to the night background image 82 are stored. And are stored. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the change of the background image more clearly.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the sound is controlled so as to output a special sound different from these normal sounds (day background normal sound, night background normal sound) and mounted on the waveform control board 114. The ROM 114b also stores special sound data indicating special sounds. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the special sound is output, the game is controlled so that the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special sound is output. It raises the expectation for the probable big hit of the person.

  In this embodiment, no special sound is provided for each background image. That is, when outputting a special sound, the same special sound is output regardless of the type of the background image. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that a special sound is being output, so that a sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be increased when the special sound is output. In addition, you may comprise so that a special sound may differ for every background image, and since the combination of the background image displayed and the sound output aspect output increases in this case, the effect performed Can be diversified.

  In this embodiment, the change in the background image and the change in the sound output mode (normal sound) are synchronized, and a special sound different from the normal sound is output when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player's expectation can be synergistically increased by the background image and the sound output mode. For example, in the state in which the display of the night background image 82 is controlled, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be enhanced as compared with the case where the normal daytime background image 81 is displayed, and the special image regardless of the type of the background image. In the state where the sound is being output, the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be increased more than in the case where the normal sound is being output. In a state where the display is controlled and a special sound is output, both the player's expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, the player's expectation can be increased step by step depending on the type of background image and the sound output mode. For example, the display state of the daytime background image 81 and the state in which the normal sound is output <the state in which the daytime background image 81 is displayed and the state in which the special sound is output ≦ the display of the night background image 82 is controlled, and In addition, the player's expectation for the big hit and the probable big hit can be increased step by step in the order of the normal sound output state <the night background image 82 is displayed and the special sound is output.

  FIG. 52 shows sound control processing executed by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111. First, the CPU 111a executes a sound change determination process (step S161). In the sound change determination process, it is determined whether or not to change the sound output mode output by the sound wave device 115 based on a determination table described later.

  Here, the determination table set in accordance with the type of variation pattern for starting the next variation display and the sound output mode in the previous variation display will be described. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a probability variation big hit determination table, a non-probability variable big hit determination table, a reach determination table, and a loss determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern for starting the next fluctuation display is a probable big hit, that is, when the probable big hit command is received when the fluctuation pattern that is a big hit is received, Next, when the fluctuation pattern that starts the fluctuation display is a non-probable big hit, that is, when the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit is received, the probability variation big hit command is not received, and the fluctuation pattern that starts the fluctuation display next is When the reach is out of sync, that is, when the fluctuation pattern that is out of reach with the reach mode is received, and when the next change pattern that starts the display of fluctuation is out of the range without the reach mode, that is, normal fluctuation, and When a fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuation is received, it is different from normal sounds (day background normal sounds, night background normal sounds) and special sounds. The determination table is provided a plurality of types that are set, respectively.

  In the probability variation big hit determination table that is selected when the variation pattern for starting the next variation display is the probability variation big hit, a determination value is assigned so that the sound output mode in the previous variation display is continued at a high rate. If the probability change jackpot is changed at a high rate from the normal sound to the special sound, the player's expectation for the probability change jackpot is reduced when the normal sound is output. Therefore, even if the sound output mode in the previous fluctuation display is a normal sound and the next fluctuation display is a probable big hit, the normal sound is output by continuing the normal sound at a high rate. Does not reduce the expectation for. Further, when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a special sound, the sound output mode is changed at a higher rate than in the case where the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a normal sound. The player's interest can be further improved by reducing the sense of expectation for the probable jackpot by switching to the sound and then making the probable jackpot.

  Next, in the non-probability variable big hit determination table selected when the fluctuation pattern for starting the fluctuation display is non-probable variable big hit, determination values are assigned so that the sound output mode is a normal sound. In this embodiment, when the normal pattern is output by changing to the normal sound when the fluctuation pattern to start the next fluctuation display becomes the non-probable big hit, the special sound is further prevented so that the normal sound is not output. Is controlled so that it is always a probable big hit. With this configuration, when a special sound is output, the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced.

  In the probability variation big hit determination table, if the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a special sound, the sound output mode is changed at a higher rate than when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a normal sound. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern to start the next fluctuation display is non-probable big hit, even if it is changed to normal sound, the player does not know whether it is probable big hit or non-probable big hit. Even when the special sound is changed to the normal sound when the display is started, the expectation for the probable big hit is not lowered so much.

  Further, in the reach failure determination table and the disconnection determination table, determination values are assigned so that the sound output mode in the previous variation display is continued at a high rate. As described above, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in this embodiment is one third of 315.5, and most of the fluctuation patterns designated from the main control board 101 are the reach deviation and the deviation fluctuation patterns. Therefore, when the next fluctuation display is out of reach or out of reach, the sound output mode is not changed frequently (continue to some extent) by continuing the sound output mode at a high rate, so the sound output mode is changed frequently. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Next, the CPU 111a determines whether or not the special sound output flag is set (step S162). The special sound output flag is set when it is determined in the sound change determination process (step S161) that the sound output mode is changed to the special sound, and the sound output mode output from the sound wave device 115 is the special sound. It is a flag indicating that there is. If the special sound output flag is set in step S162, a signal instructing the sound output data of the special sound is output to the waveform control board 114 (step S163).

  If the special sound output flag is not set in step S162, it is confirmed whether the daytime background flag is ON (step S164). The signal is output to the waveform control board 114 (step S165), and if the daytime background flag is ON, a signal instructing sound control data of the daytime background normal sound is output to the waveform control board 114 (step S166). As described above, the background image is changed when the background change notice is executed in the blackout effect. In step S164, the state of the day / background flag that is turned ON / OFF by the background change notice is determined. Yes.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the sound change determination process (step S161). In the sound change determination process, the CPU 111a first checks whether the special sound output flag is set (step 171). If the special sound output flag is set in step S171, the special sound output selection table is set (step S172). If the special sound output flag is not set in step S171, the normal sound output selection table is set. (Step S173).

  Next, the CPU 111a reads a sound determination random number stored in the RAM 111b mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 (step S174). The sound determination random number is extracted from a counter that updates the sound determination random number when a variation display pattern command is received from the main control board 101, and is stored in the RAM 111b corresponding to the variation pattern command. That is, the sound determination random number read in step S174 is stored in the RAM 111b corresponding to the variation pattern for starting the next variation display.

  Further, in this embodiment, a different determination table is selected according to the type of variation pattern to start the next variation display and the sound output mode in the previous variation display. That is, depending on whether it is a big hit (step S175), if it is a big hit, whether it is a probable big hit (step S176), if it is not a big hit, whether to reach (step S179). The non-probable big hit determination table (step S177), the probable big hit determination table (step S178), the reach determination table (step S180), and the loss determination table (step S181) are selected.

  After selecting the determination table in steps S171 to S181 described above, it is confirmed whether the sound is a special sound based on the sound determination random number read in step S174 and the selected determination table (step S182). In this case, if the special sound output flag is not set (step S183), the special sound output flag is set (step S184).

  If it is determined in step S182 that the special sound output flag is not set (step S185), the special sound output flag is reset (step S186).

  With the above processing, it is possible to change the normal sound corresponding to the background image, and the player can more clearly grasp the change of the background image. Further, the normal sound of the daytime background or the normal sound of the night background is output from the sound wave device 115 according to the type of the background image, and the sound output is performed when it is determined to change the sound output mode in the sound change determination process (step S161). In order to change the aspect to a special sound, when a special sound is output, the player is in a certain state (especially a state where it is likely to be a big hit), and the expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased Can be increased.

  Next, the rendering operation of the liquid crystal display 116 accompanying the decorative symbol variation display will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 64. FIGS. 55 to 64 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effects produced by the liquid crystal display.

  First, a variation display example of a decorative design will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation display pattern of variation number 1 in which the big hit determination random number is an outlier in the above-described big hit determination process and no reach is included. The CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 receives information such as the variable display pattern, the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the stop symbol selected so that the right decorative symbol 80c is different from each other. Transmit to the control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 describes the process of effect display control executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data is selected, and control of decorative symbols and the like is started based on the contents described in the process data. That is, the variable display of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is started in a semi-transparent display mode so that the background image (daytime background image 81) can be seen based on the selected process data (FIG. 55A). At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c change rapidly from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 (the moving speed is faster than the process in which each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed. Fluctuation) is displayed. Further, the decorative pattern 80b in the middle is variably displayed in an opaque display mode rather than a semi-transparent display mode.

  Then, after the predetermined time elapses based on the process data, the left decorative pattern 80a out of the left and right decorative patterns 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed, and the display gradually changes from the high speed fluctuation to the low speed fluctuation display. The display is changed from translucent to an opaque display mode in which the background image (daytime background image 81) cannot be seen through (FIG. 55B). Then, the left decorative symbol 80a stops and displays the designated stop symbol (“7” is illustrated in FIG. 55) (FIG. 55C).

  Similarly to the left decorative design 80a, the right decorative design 80c is changed from a high-speed change to a low-speed change display in a process in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed based on the process data. To an opaque display mode. Then, the right decorative design 80c stops and displays a stop design (designated as “6” in FIG. 55) designated to be different from the left decorative design 80a (FIG. 55D).

  Next, an example of the advance notice effect for displaying the character images 70 to 74 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 11 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 11, as described above, the variable display pattern, the evolved notice pattern number 11, The control data of the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 is selected according to the information, and information such as the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern number 11 and the stop pattern is stored in the second electric decoration control board 113. Send. Also, a timer set in the control data is started on the sub-integrated board 111. This timer synchronizes with the image display control executed on the basis of the process data selected by the second electrical control board 113, the drive control of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, and This is for performing lighting control of the decoration lamp 49 and sound control of the sound wave device 115.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect display executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern and the advanced notice pattern number 11 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data in which a control process is described is selected, and control of decoration symbols, the above-described character image display, and the like is started based on the contents described in the process data. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is started based on the selected process data (FIG. 56 (A)).

  Then, display control of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man based on the process data is performed in the display area 42 (FIG. 56B). Note that the one-step step 1 described above is the display control of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man from the state where only the character image 70 imitating the monster is displayed in the display area 42 (B). This is a state developed from the 0 stage in which only the character image 70 imitating a monster is displayed and controlled to the 1 stage in which the character image 71 imitating a wolf man is displayed and controlled. .

  After the display control of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man in FIG. 56 (B), the process based on the process data is further executed, and the character image 72 imitating the dracula is displayed in the display area 42 when a predetermined period has elapsed. Control is performed (FIG. 56C). This state is the above-described two-stage step 2, and the stage has been developed from the first stage in which the character image 71 imitating the wolf man is controlled to the second stage in which the character image 72 imitating the dracula is controlled. State.

  56B and 56C, display control of all the mini character images 90 to 93 is performed on the display area 42 based on the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 11. In this case, two types of notice effects are simultaneously executed so that the character images 70 to 74 are displayed by the advanced notice effect and the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed in the display area 42 by the mini character notice effect. . Therefore, it is possible to make the notice effect more lively than to execute only one of the advanced notice effect and the mini character notice effect, and the game does not become monotonous for the player, and the decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed. can do. Note that the mini-character notice effect can be executed simultaneously with the advanced notice and the lightning notice effect that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear, similarly to the advanced notice effect that displays the character images 70 to 74.

  Here, although the description regarding the several layer displayed on the display area 42 is mentioned later, while displaying the mini character image 90-93 on the back surface of the decoration design 80a-80c, while the character image 71 imitating a wolf man and Dracula are displayed. Since the simulated character image 72 is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c, the character image 71 imitating a wolf man and the character image 72 imitating a dracula are displayed in front of the mini character images 90 to 93. For example, a mini character image 90 representing a Hiroshi is displayed in FIG. 56B, but a mini character image 90 representing a Hiroshi is displayed by displaying a character image 72 simulating a Dracula in FIG. 56C. And part of the variable display of the left decorative design 80a is not visible. Accordingly, the player is given priority to pay attention to the advance notice effect in which the character images 70 to 74 are displayed rather than the mini character notice effect in which the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. Can do.

  After the display control of the character image 72 simulating Dracula in FIG. 56C, the process based on the process data is further executed, and the character image 73 simulating Franken is displayed in the display area 42 when a predetermined period has elapsed. (FIG. 56D). This state is step 3 of the above-described three stages, and the stage is developed from the two stages in which the character image 72 imitating the Dracula is displayed and controlled to the three stages in which the character image 73 imitating the Franken is displayed and controlled. It is.

  After the display control of the character image 73 simulating Franken in FIG. 56D, the process based on the process data is further executed, and the character image 70 simulating a monster is displayed in the display area 42 when a predetermined period has elapsed. Control is performed (FIG. 56E). This state is the above-described four-stage step 4, and the stage has been expanded from the three stages in which the character image 73 imitating Franken is displayed and controlled to the four stages in which the character image 70 imitating the monster is displayed and controlled. State.

  In this embodiment, the character images 71 to 73 whose display is controlled in the display area 42 are continuously displayed from the first stage (FIG. 56B) to the third stage (FIG. 56D). Thus, control is performed so that the effect display by a plurality of characters is possible. Further, the player can grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect based on the number of display of the character images 71 to 73 whose display is controlled in the display area 42. Further, as described above, the stage of the advanced notice effect develops. As a result, the degree of expectation for the big hit increases, so that the expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of display of the character images 71 to 73.

  Next, a production example of the intense heat notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the intense heat notification effect of the intense heat notification pattern number 3 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice pattern No. 6, 7, 11, or 12, the advanced notice notice pattern No. 3 When it is decided to execute the heat notice effect, as described above, it is decided by the character imitating Franken displayed in the advanced notice pattern (step 3 of the advanced notice pattern) and the intense heat notice pattern. In addition to the information such as the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, the stop pattern, etc., the character that imitates the franken character (step 3 of the intense heat notice pattern) matches the character. Information on the intense heat notice pattern of pattern number 3 is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 corresponds to the intense heat notice pattern of the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, and the intense heat notice pattern number 3 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data describing a process of effect display control to be executed in the display area 42 to be selected, and control of decorative symbols, image display of the above-described character, etc. is performed based on the contents described in the process data. Start. Unlike the character image 73 simulating the Franken image displayed with the advanced notice pattern at the timing of controlling the display of the character image 73 simulating the Franken according to the developed notice pattern, the white color is used as the base. The white character image 76 simulating Franken changed to the color scheme is displayed in the display area 42 (FIG. 57). For example, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 11 and when it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 3, FIG. A) In the scene where the character image 73 imitating the franken in FIG. 56D in the advanced notice effect of FIG. 56E is displayed and controlled, the white character image simulating the franken in FIG. 57 instead of the character image 73 76 is displayed in the display area 42.

  Further, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 11 and when it is decided to execute the intense notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 1, FIG. In the scene where the character image 71 imitating the wolf man in FIG. 56 (B) in the advanced notice effect of FIGS. When display control of a white character image (not shown) is performed in the display area 42 and it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 2, the processes shown in FIGS. 56 (A) to 56 (E) are performed. In a scene where the character image 72 simulating the Dracula in FIG. 56C in the advanced notice effect is displayed and controlled, the white character simulating the wolf man with a different color scheme of the clothing instead of the character image 72 56A to 56E when the display image 42 is controlled to be displayed in the display area 42 and it is decided to execute the intense heat notification effect of the intense heat notification pattern number 4 (FIG. 56A to FIG. 56E). In the scene where the character image 70 imitating the monster in FIG. 56 (E) in the type notice effect is displayed, not the character image 70 but a white character image (not shown) imitating a wolf man with a different color scheme of clothing is displayed. Display control is performed in the area 42.

  Next, an example of the advance notice effect that drives the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 16 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 16, as described above, the variation display pattern, the evolved notice pattern number 16, and , Drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, effect lamps 44a, 44b, decoration lamps 49, and control data for the sound wave device 115, as well as variable display pattern, advanced notice pattern number 11, stop symbol, etc. Is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113. Also, a timer set in the control data is started on the sub-integrated board 111.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect display executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern, the advance notice pattern number 16 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data in which a control process is described is selected, and control of decoration symbols, the above-described character image display, and the like is started based on the contents described in the process data. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is started based on the selected process data.

  Note that in the advanced notice effect of the advanced notice pattern number 16, the character images 150 to 73 are controlled by the drive control of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 without controlling the display of the character images 71 to 73 in the display area 42. This is done by causing 152 and 154 to appear. Further, as described above, the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are controlled by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 by outputting a drive signal to the first electrical decoration control board 112. Control data relating to these drive controls is not set in the process data selected by the CPU 113a mounted on the illumination control board 113. The process data selected corresponding to the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 16 includes the actions of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 by the drive control of the drive motors 150 h, 152 h, 153 f, 155 and the display area 42. Until the predetermined drive control is executed by the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 in order to synchronize the display mode, when the decorative pattern is displayed and the predetermined drive control is executed (for example, Control data for controlling the display of the character image 70 is set (when it becomes (D ′) in FIG. 58).

  When the display control of the display area 42 based on the process data is started by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113, that is, when the decorative symbol variation display is started, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 controls. A character 154 imitating a wolf man by outputting a drive signal to the drive motor 155 based on the data is caused to appear so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period of time (FIG. 58 (A ′ )). It should be noted that the above-described one-step step 1 ′ is a state in which a character body 154 imitating a wolf man appears from the state where only the character image 70 imitating a monster is displayed on the display area 42 (A). '), And the stage was developed from the 0 stage where only the character image 70 imitating the monster was controlled to the 1 stage where the character body 154 imitating the wolf man appeared for a predetermined period. State.

  58A, after the character body 154 imitating a wolf man appears for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42, the CPU 111a further performs processing based on the control data. When a predetermined period has passed, a character 152 that imitates a dracula by outputting a drive signal to the drive motors 152h and 153f appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period. (FIG. 58 (B ′)). This state is the above-described two-stage step 2 ′, and the stage is changed from the first stage in which the character body 154 imitating the wolf man appears for a predetermined period to the second stage in which the character body 152 imitating the dracula appears for a predetermined period. It is a developed state.

  The character body 152 imitating a Dracula in FIG. 58 (B ′) appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period, and then the CPU 111a further executes processing based on the control data. Then, when a predetermined period has passed, a character is imitated by outputting a drive signal to the drive motor 150h and imitating a flanken for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42 (see FIG. 58 (C ′)). This state is step 3 of the above-described three stages, and the stage is developed from the two stages where the character body 152 imitating Dracula appears for a predetermined period to the three stages where the character object 150 imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period. It is in the state.

  58C. After causing character body 150 imitating Franken to appear so as to cover part of display area 42 in front of display area 42 for a predetermined period, CPU 111a further performs processing based on control data. When a predetermined period has elapsed, a drive signal is output to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 to cause the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear. Then, after a predetermined period of time, the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the display of the character image 70 simulating a monster based on the process data (FIG. 58 (E ′)). At this time, the CPU 111a outputs drive signals to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 based on the control data to accommodate the character bodies 150, 152, and 154. As described above, the operation of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the display of the character images 70 to 73 in the display area 42 are synchronized by the timer set in the control data and the timer set in the process data. ing. Note that this state is the above-described four-step step 4, and the step is changed from the three steps in which the character body imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period to the four steps in which the character image 70 imitating the monster is displayed and controlled. It is a developed state.

  When shifting from FIG. 56 (D) to FIG. 56 (E) and when shifting from FIG. 58 (D ′) to FIG. 58 (E ′), control for stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 80a is executed. ing. However, the middle decorative symbol 80b and the right decorative symbol 80c are not stopped and displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect is executed before the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative designs 80a to 80c is started.

  In this embodiment, control is performed so that the appearance directions of the character image and the character body corresponding to the same character are the same. For example, display control is performed so that the character image 71 appears from the left side of the display area 42 in FIG. 56B, and the character body 154 is moved to the left side of the display area 42 by driving the drive motor 155 in FIG. It is comprised so that it may appear from the accommodating part 160 provided in the direction. By configuring in this way, the character image corresponding to the same character and the character member appear from the same direction, so that the player can more clearly understand that the relationship between the character image and the character body is the same. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect is executed by causing one of the character image and the character member to appear at each stage, and display control of the character image corresponding to the same character at each stage You may comprise so that both a character image and a character body may appear by performing drive control of the drive motor which can operate a character body. With this configuration, the character can be displayed in a more visible manner at each stage, so that the player can easily recognize that the effect is being executed, and the player's sense of expectation Can be further enhanced.

  In this case, it may be configured such that both the character body and the character image appear only when the background image is the night background image 82, and when only one of them appears by such a configuration. You can give an impression that more monsters are making noise at night, so you can give a stronger impression that the monsters start moving at night.

  When both the character body and the character image appear in the advanced notice effect, the appearance direction of the character image may differ from the appearance direction of the character body. That is, in this embodiment, since the character body appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42, an area in which the character image is displayed by the character body by causing the character image and the character body to appear from the same direction. There is a possibility that the character image cannot be visually recognized. This problem can be solved by changing the appearance direction of the character image and the character body.

  In this embodiment, the number of character images to be displayed and controlled in the advanced notice effect is different from the number of character bodies that appear by controlling the drive motor, but the number of character images is different. And the number of character bodies may be the same. That is, in this embodiment, character images 70 to 73 corresponding to four characters (in this example, monster-kun, wolf man, Dracula, Franken) and three characters (in this example, wolf man, Dracula). , Franken) and the character body 150, 152, 154 corresponding to the character body 150, 152, and 154, the four types of character members (in this embodiment, monsters) corresponding to the four characters 70 to 73 are executed. (Kun, wolf man, Dracula, Franken) may be provided to perform the advanced notice effect. Further, the number of character images to be displayed and controlled in the advanced notice effect may be configured to be smaller than the number of character bodies that appear by controlling the driving motor. For example, three characters (wolf) The advanced notice effect may be executed by a character image corresponding to a man, Dracula, Franken) and a character body corresponding to four characters (Monster-kun, Wolf Man, Dracula, Franken).

  Further, in this embodiment, the character body is switched and displayed at each stage. However, even if control is performed so that a plurality of characters can be controlled at each stage by continuously causing the character body to appear. Good. In addition, the player can grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect based on the number of character bodies that appear, and further, as described above, since the stage of the advanced notice effect develops, the big hit expectation increases. A sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of character bodies appearing.

  When both the character body and the character image are displayed at the same stage in the advanced notice effect, only one of the character image and the character body is continuously displayed at each stage. You may control as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect according to the number of appearances of the character body and the display number of the character images, and further, as described above, the stage of the advanced notice effect is developed. Since the degree of expectation for the big hit is increased, the expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of character bodies appearing.

  Next, an example of the lightning notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 shows a determination example of jackpot determination as effect example 1 of the lightning warning effect. The main control board 101 determines that the variation display pattern is “function reach reach, hit” as the variation number 33, and The case where the lightning bolt warning pattern number 2 (twice blackout) is determined as the lightning warning pattern from the lightning bolt warning table for the daytime background on the integrated substrate 111 is shown.

  When the special symbol display on the special symbol display 41 is started, the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c is also started on the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 (FIG. 59A). Specifically, in the vicinity of the center of the display area 42, the display pattern is variably displayed in such a manner that the middle decorative symbol 80b jumps, and a background image is visible on both sides of the central decorative symbol 80b. The left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c that are translucent are displayed in a variable manner in such a manner that the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42. In addition, a daytime background image 81 is displayed in the display area 42, and a character image (monster) 70 is displayed below the decorative pattern 80b in the middle (lower center of the display area 42).

  Next, as the first blackout effect, a darkening image 83 that darkens the display area 42 that controls the display of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c and the daytime background image 81 so as to be difficult for the player to visually recognize is predetermined. Time (for example, 1 second) is displayed (FIG. 59 (B)). At this time, the player can recognize that one of a plurality of lightning notice effects has been started, and a special effect with a high expectation of jackpot (a super reach development effect that starts from a spotlight notice) , Etc.) can have a sense of expectation to be performed. After that, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 59C).

  Next, as the second blackout effect, the darkness image 83 having a higher darkening degree than the darkness during the first blackout effect is displayed for the first time so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. Is displayed for a time (for example, 2 seconds) longer than the production time during the blackout production (FIG. 59D). At this time, the player can recognize that at least the lightning warning pattern number 1 is not the blackout gasse effect, and the second lightning warning pattern number 2 may be performed. However, the expectation that special effects (super-reaching development production and feature reach production, etc. started from spotlight notice) will be performed for the first time will be higher than the first blackout production. This can be improved compared to blackout production. In other words, by performing the blackout effect twice, the expectation that a special effect (such as a super reach development effect or an accessory reach effect started from a spotlight notice) will be gradually improved. be able to. Thereafter, as in the case after the first blackout effect, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the contents before the blackout effect is performed (FIG. 59E).

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach form (in the figure, a reach form of “77” is illustrated) is formed, and the accessory reach production is started. The character 84 “instruction reach” to be notified is displayed (FIG. 59 (F)). At this time, since the content before the blackout effect was continuously displayed after the second blackout effect, a special effect (a spotlight notice or role) with a higher expectation level than a super reach effect was displayed. It is possible to improve the feeling of expectation that it was the second blackout gasse production without the performance of the object reach, etc., and to improve it again by performing the effect reach production. It is possible to give a sharpness to interest. In the character reach production, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 attached to the effect device 40 operate, and still stop according to the state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168. There is an effect that the decorative pattern 80b that is not displayed is variably displayed.

  Next, in the lightning warning effect production example 1, since the variable number 33 “actual reach, hit” is determined, the decorative pattern 80b in the middle stops at the same design as the left and right decorative patterns 80a and 80c. By the display, the big hit symbol (in the figure, the big hit symbol “777” is illustrated) is fixedly displayed (FIG. 59 (G)). After that, the combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is a jackpot symbol, and the opening image 85 that informs the player that the jackpot game will be started can be displayed and controlled with the above-described multiple types of effects. The character images 70 to 75 are displayed (FIG. 59 (H)).

  FIG. 60 shows, as a lightning warning notice production example 2, the main control board 101 determines one of the change numbers 1, 3 to 22 as a change display pattern, and uses the sub-integrated board 111 from the daylight background lightning notice table. The case where the background change effect of lightning warning pattern number 3 is determined as the lightning warning pattern is shown. Note that the first blackout effect is also performed in the lightning notice effect example 2 as in the effect example 1.

  After the first blackout effect, when a predetermined time elapses, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 60A). Thereafter, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 60B). Thereafter, the display area 42 is controlled so as to continue the content before the blackout effect is performed, but a night background image 82 different from the background image before the blackout effect is displayed is displayed as the background image. (FIG. 60 (C)). At this time, there will be no special effects (such as spotlight notices or role-reach effects) that have a higher expectation level than the Super Reach effect. The lightning warning table for lightning backgrounds (Fig. 47) is used to determine the lightning flash pattern, making it easier to perform lightning flash warnings for lightning warning pattern numbers 4 and 5, and for selecting the advanced warning effect. By using the advanced notice table (FIG. 40), the operating rate of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 is improved, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (in the figure, the “77” reach mode is illustrated) is formed, and notification that the reach effect is started is notified. A character 86 of “reach” is displayed (FIG. 60D). Thereafter, a super reach effect, a super reach development effect, or the like corresponding to any one of the change display patterns of the change numbers 1, 3 to 22 determined on the main control board 101 is performed. The background image 82 is the night background image 82 when the decorative pattern variation display is started in the display area 42, and the background change effect of the lightning warning pattern number 3 is used as the lightning warning pattern from the night background lightning warning table on the sub-integrated board 111. If determined, a daytime background image 81 different from the background image before the blackout effect is displayed is displayed as the background image after the second blackout effect.

  FIG. 61 shows the example 3 of the lightning notice effect, in which the main control board 101 determines any of the change numbers 4, 6 to 10, 12 to 16, and 18 to 22 as the change display pattern. The case where the lightning flash effect of lightning warning pattern number 5 is determined as the lightning warning pattern from the background lightning warning table is shown. Note that the first blackout effect is also performed in the third lightning effect effect example 3, as in the first effect example.

  After the first blackout effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the display area 42 is controlled so as to continue the contents before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 61A). Thereafter, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 61B). After that, the effect lamp 44a arranged above the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 blinks and lights up, and a lightning flash notice for running a lightning (thunder) 87 on the dark image 83 from above the display area 42 is performed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 80a (illustrated as “7” in the figure) is stopped and displayed so as to appear in the dark image 83 by being illuminated by the lightning 87 (FIG. 61C).

  Next, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first and second blackout effects is displayed in the second blackout effect so that the player cannot see (not visible). A time comparable to the time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 61D). At this time, the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed on the right side of the display area 42 in a state where the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and the middle and right decorative symbols 80b and 80c are variably displayed. The lower part is darker than a normal display (for example, when a reach effect or the like is not executed), and is darkly displayed to the extent that it is difficult for the player to view. In this embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed by the first lightning flash warning, and the left decorative symbol 80a is continuously stopped and displayed in the dark image 83 thereafter. It is sufficient that the reach mode is formed before the production (in this case, the second lightning flash notice described later) is completed, and the left decorative symbol 80a is not stopped and displayed in the first lightning flash notice. In (D), the left decorative design 80a may be in a variable display.

  Next, after a third blackout effect, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the effect lamps 44a and 44b arranged on the upper right side of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 flash and light multiple times. When a lightning flash advance notice is made to run the lightning (lightning) 87 on the dark image 83 from the right side of the display area 42, the right decorative design is displayed together with the left decorative design 80a that is already stopped by being illuminated by the lightning 87. 80c (“7” is illustrated in the figure) is stopped and displayed so as to appear in the dark image 83 (FIG. 61E). At this time, since the second lightning flash announcement was made, the player will not be out of reach with normal reach and super reach production, and in other cases, the big hit expectation is high With Super Reach Development and Super Reach Branch Premier production, you can expect a big hit.

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (in the figure, the “77” reach mode is illustrated) is formed, and notification that the reach effect is started is notified. A character 86 “REACH” is displayed (FIG. 61F). Thereafter, a super reach effect or a super reach development effect corresponding to any of the change display patterns of change numbers 4, 6 to 10, 12 to 16, and 18 to 22 determined by the main control board 101 is performed. If the lightning bolt warning pattern number 4 is determined as the lightning warning pattern on the sub-integrated board 111, the second lightning flash warning is not performed, but only the first lightning flash warning is performed.

  FIG. 62 shows, as a lightning warning effect production example 4, the main control board 101 determines one of the fluctuation numbers 29 and 30 as the fluctuation display pattern, and the sub-integrated board 111 shows the lightning warning from the daytime background lightning warning table. The case where the blackout production of the lightning notice pattern number 2 is decided twice as a pattern is shown. It should be noted that the first blackout effect is performed in the lightning warning effect example 4 as well as in the effect example 1.

  After the first blackout effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 62A). Thereafter, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 62B). Thereafter, a spotlight notice is made under the center of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 while a character (a character image (monster) 70 is illustrated) appears in the spotlight 88 (FIG. 5). 62 (C)). At this time, since the spotlight notice is performed, the player can confirm that the super reach development effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is performed, and can improve the expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, since the super reach development effect corresponding to the character is performed, it is possible to recognize the high expectation degree of the big hit, and it is possible to have various feelings of expectation depending on the character that has appeared. Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are the normal decorative symbols (for example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed) in the lower right portion of the display area 42 (the portion that is not illuminated by the spotlight 88). This is smaller than when the variable display is executed, and is darkly displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Next, the character image (monster) 70 lowers the start image 89 for starting the super reach development effect corresponding to the character whose image display is controlled by the spotlight notice from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. An effect is performed (FIG. 62D). Thereafter, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed as a super reach development effect corresponding to one of the variable display patterns of the variable numbers 29 and 30 determined on the main control board 101, thereby reaching the reach mode ( In the figure, the super reach development effect is started in a state in which the reach mode of “77” is formed (FIG. 62E).

  In the lightning flash notice and the spotlight notice, the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 is set to the dark image 83 by the blackout effect, so that the lightning (lightning) 87 can be run or the spotlight 88 can be bathed on the character. It is a notice effect that becomes possible. Therefore, it can be said that the lightning flash notice and the spotlight notice are effects unique to the dark display by performing the blackout effect.

  As described above, according to the configuration of this embodiment, it is difficult to visually recognize the entire display area where the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed in the display area 42, the character image 70, and the like. By displaying the dark image 83 for a predetermined time, the player pays attention to the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c until the dark image 83 is displayed, the character image 70, and the like. This makes it possible to effectively make the notice effect (blackout effect) that the player wants to be aware of. In addition, after making the notice effect start by the blackout effect, the effect lamps 44a and 44b of the effect device 40 are turned on and blinked as the notice effect, and the lightning 87 is displayed in the display area 42. By displaying the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c in a visible manner in such a production manner, it is possible to effectively pay attention to a notice production that the player wants to be aware of. Therefore, by noticing and paying attention to the notice effect that the player wants to be aware of, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous and suppresses a decrease in the interest of the game. Can do.

  Note that, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, a dark image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire area where information such as the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c and the character image 70 is displayed in the display area 42 is displayed. 83 is displayed for a predetermined time, but it is sufficient that the player cannot pay attention to the information display. For example, only a bright image or a background image is displayed in the display area 42 as an image different from the dark image 83. Alternatively, the information display may be concealed by erasing an image including the information display by turning off the power of the display area 42 or providing an operable concealment member in the effect device 40 or the like.

  In addition, conventionally, there are some cases where a plurality of characters are displayed, and other effects other than the special symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display device are performed lively, but even if a plurality of characters are displayed, the jackpot symbol is not displayed. It was rarely derived and did not make the character aware. However, such a presentation can be made conscious by the configuration of the present embodiment.

  Next, an example of the mini character notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the mini character notice effect of the mini character notice pattern No. 1 described above. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the mini character notice pattern No. 1 mini character notice pattern, as described above, the variable display pattern, the mini character notice pattern No. 1 mini character notice pattern, and the stop Information such as symbols is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect display control executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern and the mini character notice pattern number 1 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. The process data in which the above process is described is selected, and control of the decorative design, the above-described mini character image display, and the like based on the contents described in the process data is started. That is, the variable display of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is started in a translucent display mode based on the selected process data. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c change rapidly from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 (the moving speed is faster than the process in which each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed. Fluctuation) is displayed. Further, for the decorative pattern 80b in the middle, since the mini character image display by the mini character notice is not performed on the back side, it is not necessary to make the back side visible to the player, and the display mode is not a translucent display mode but an opaque display mode. The display is variable. However, even if the decorative pattern 80b in the inside is variably displayed in a translucent display mode, it does not affect the player's visual recognition.

  Then, based on the process data, the display on the lower right side of the display area 42 and the door displayed on the back of the right decorative design 80c is opened, and the mini character image 90 representing the Hiroshi in the form where the upper body is mounted is displayed in the display area 42 Display control is performed (FIG. 63A). At this time, the right decorative design 80c is variably displayed in a translucent display mode, and the player can visually recognize the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the right decorative design 80c. Therefore, the player does not need to move the viewpoint between the right decorative symbol 80c and the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, and displays the Hiroshi while gazing at the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c. The mini character image 90 can be visually recognized.

  Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed based on the process data, the door displayed on the back of the right decorative design 80a is closed while the left decorative design 80a is stopped and displayed among the left and right decorative designs 80a and 80c. Then, the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi is controlled to be hidden in the display area 42 (FIG. 63B). At this time, the left decorative design 80a is gradually changed from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation display, and is changed from translucent to opaque display mode. Therefore, even if the player is gazing at the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, the player can surely recognize that the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed. Then, the left decorative design 80a stops and displays the designated stop design (in the figure, “7” is exemplified) (FIG. 63C).

  Similarly to the left decorative design 80a, the right decorative design 80c is changed from a high-speed change to a low-speed change display in a process in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed based on the process data. To an opaque display mode. Then, the right decorative design 80c stops and displays a stop design (designated as “6” in FIG. 63) designated to be different from the left decorative design 80a (FIG. 63D).

  In this embodiment, a display area having a smaller display area than the respective variable display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c, that is, inside the variable display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. The mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are easily visible to the player. Note that it is not necessary to move the viewpoint between the decorative symbols 80a to 80c displayed in the display region 42 and the mini character images 90 to 93, and characters are displayed in some display regions of the decorative symbol variable display regions. Even if the image is displayed, the character image may be displayed in all the display areas in the decorative symbol variation display area. Further, for example, the mini character image may be displayed in a display area having a display area larger than that of the decorative symbol variation display region so that the decoration symbol variation display region and the mini character image display region overlap.

  Here, in the liquid crystal display 116, display control is performed on the display area 42 as one effect image by superimposing a plurality of layers. Here, the image data of the background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82), mini character images 90 to 93, left / middle / right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, etc. The image data stored in the ROM 113b is read out separately to the RAM 113c of the second electrical decoration control board 113 at a predetermined timing based on the process data, and is output to the liquid crystal display 116. It is displayed in the display area 42 as a layer. Priorities displayed in the display area 42 are set for these image data (a plurality of layers). By superposing upper layers in order from the lowest layer, priority is given to higher layers. Are displayed in the display area 42.

  A plurality of layers for displaying the mini character notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows an explanation of a plurality of layers for displaying the advanced notice effect in which steps 1, 2, and 3 of the aforementioned advanced notice pattern are executed and the mini character notice effect of the mini character notice pattern number 11 described above. FIG. The plurality of layers for executing the mini character notice effect include a background layer 42a in which a background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82) is displayed as at least the lowest layer, and a mini as a first middle layer. The mini character layer 42b on which the character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed in a variable manner as the second middle layer (the higher layer than the first middle layer). The symbol layer 42c to be displayed and the notice character layer 42d in which the character images 70 to 75 are displayed as the highest layer are configured.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (A), the background layer 42a depicts a daytime background image 81 as a background image, a door 94a at the lower right, a door 94b at the upper left, a door 94c at the upper right, and a door 94c at the lower left. A door 94d is depicted. Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the mini character layer 42b has a mini character image 90 showing a Hiroshi at a position corresponding to the lower right door 94a of the background layer 42a, and a position corresponding to the lower left door 94b. A mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi's sister, a mini character image 92 imitating a triplet at a position corresponding to the upper right door 94c, and a mini character image imitating a monster at a position corresponding to the lower left door 94d. 93 is depicted. Note that the mini character images 90 to 93 include a depiction of a door that is in a half-open state together with the mini character.

  Then, by overlapping the background layer 42a and the mini character layer 42b that is higher than the background layer 42a, the doors 94a to 94d depicted in the daytime background image 81 are not visible, and the mini character image 90 to 93 becomes visible. It should be noted that only the necessary mini character images among the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed on the mini character layer 42b in accordance with the mini character notice pattern number. For example, when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 1 is determined, only the mini character image 90 is displayed on the mini character area 42b, and as shown in FIG. Only the character image 90 representing Hiroshi is displayed in the display area 42.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64C, the symbol layer 42c includes a left decorative symbol 80a in a semi-transparent display mode and a middle decorative symbol in an opaque display mode at a position overlapping with the display area of the mini character images 91 and 93. The right decorative design 80c is depicted in a translucent display manner at a position overlapping the display area of 80b, the mini character images 90 and 92. Then, by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c, which is higher than the mini character layer 42b, the back of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are transparent during the display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. The mini character images 90 to 93 are visible to the player.

  It should be noted that the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed on the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c in an opaque display manner at a position overlapping the display area of the mini character image 93 imitating a monster. The right decorative design 80c is depicted in an opaque display manner at a position overlapping the display area of the mini character image 90 simulating Hiroshi. When the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c that is higher than the mini character layer 42b, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are displayed. The position where the mini character images 90 and 93 are depicted is not visible to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64D, the notice character area 42d is opaque at a position overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c and the display areas of the mini character images 91 and 93. In the display mode, a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, a character image 72 imitating Dracula, and a character image 73 imitating Franken are depicted. Then, by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c and the notice character layer 42d which is higher than these layers, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c and the mini character notice are performed during the advanced notice effect. Character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are visible to the player in front of the mini character images 90 to 93 in the effect. The blank display area in the mini character layer 42b, the symbol layer 42c, and the notice character layer 42d is a transparent display mode, and can transmit the lower layer.

  FIG. 64 shows only the layer on which the daytime background image 81, the mini character images 90 to 93, the left / middle / right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, and the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are displayed. In addition to these layers, based on the image data stored in the ROM 113b of the second electrical control board 113, there are a character image 70 imitating a monster displayed with a background image, a dark image 83 in a blackout effect, and the like. Has a layer to be displayed. The character images 70 to 75 displayed in the blackout effect are displayed on the same layer as the notice character layer 42d on which the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice are displayed. Then, background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82) <mini character image 90-93 in mini character notice effect <character image 70 imitating monster-kun (displayed in the lower center of display area 42) <left / middle / Right decorative designs 80a to 80c <character images 70 to 75 in advance notice effect (character images 70 to 73 in advanced notice effect or character images 71 to 75 in black out effect) <dark image 83 in black out effect Priorities displayed in the display area 42 are set.

  Further, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 described above appear so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42, an advanced notice effect that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear is executed. Some of the mini character images 90 to 93 and the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are not visible to the player. In other words, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear with a higher priority than all the images displayed in the display area 42. For example, when mini character images 90 to 93 in the mini character notice effect are displayed, by driving the character body 154 imitating a wolf man, one of the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister and one of the left decorative symbols 80a. The part becomes invisible. Therefore, the player is given priority to the advance notice effect in which the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are driven over the mini character notice effect in which the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. Can be made.

  In this embodiment, the design layer 42c is set higher than the mini character layer 42b, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are visible through the back of the left and right decorative designs 80a and 80c. It is sufficient that the viewpoint does not need to be moved between the 80a to 80c and the mini character images 90 to 93. For example, the mini character layer 42b is higher than the symbol layer 42c, and the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are used. The mini character images 90 to 93 may be displayed on the front side of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c so as to be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. In this case, the decorative symbols 80a and 80c may be displayed in an opaque display mode.

  In this embodiment, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are variably displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, so that the back of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c can be seen transparently. 93 can be visually recognized, but the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c may be variably displayed so that the mini character images 90 to 93 can be visually recognized. For example, the left and right decorative symbols 80a are displayed in an opaque display mode. , 80c are displayed with high-speed fluctuation, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are visually recognized by using the visual effect of the after image of the mini character images 90 to 93 visible between the decorative symbols in the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. It may be possible.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
40 rendering device 42 display areas 44a, 44b rendering lamps 70-75 character image 76 white character images 80a-80c left, middle and right decorative pattern 83 dark image 90-93 mini character image 100 main board 101 main control board 110 peripheral board 111 Sub-integrated board 113 Second electrical decoration control board 114 Waveform control board 115 Sonic device 116 Liquid crystal display 150, 152, 154 Character body 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 Drive motor

Claims (2)

A display unit for displaying images;
A winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the fact that a predetermined determination condition is satisfied;
Profit grant state control for controlling to a profit grant state for giving a profit to the player after displaying a specific display mode on the display unit based on the determination that the win should be given to the player by the winning judgment means A gaming machine comprising means,
Components constituting the gaming machine body;
An effect device that is attached to the component member and forms an effect region where an effect operation is performed on a part of the component member as viewed from the player,
A main control means equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the main game of the gaming machine;
Peripheral control means equipped with a microcomputer that performs control based on a command signal transmitted from the main control means,
The stage device is
And said display unit for displaying the image toward the front side from the front Symbol effect region,
A plurality of types of effect members that can be driven to an appearance position that is visible to the player and a standby position that is not visible to the player in the effect area, and that simulate a plurality of types of character information; ,
The main control means includes
The winning determination means, the profit grant state control means,
Display pattern storage for storing a plurality of types of display patterns from when the display unit starts display control of the image and displaying the first display mode after a predetermined period of time until the determination result by the winning determination unit is displayed. Means,
Display pattern selection means for selecting the display pattern from the display pattern storage means based on the determination result by the winning determination means;
Command signal transmission means for transmitting the display pattern selected by the display pattern selection means to the peripheral control means as a command signal,
The peripheral control means includes
Image storage means for storing at least an image based on the plurality of types of display patterns as the image, a plurality of types of first effect images and a plurality of types of second effect images imitating the plurality of types of character information, respectively. ,
Display control means for controlling display on the display unit of an image based on the display pattern transmitted as the command signal ;
Effect image display control means for controlling the display unit to display any one of the plurality of types of first effect images and the plurality of types of second effect images in addition to the image based on the display pattern. When,
Effect member driving means for driving and controlling the plurality of types of effect members to the appearance position and the standby position, respectively.
An effect executed before the first display mode is displayed after display control of the image based on the display pattern is started by the display control means, wherein the plurality of types of first effect images and the plurality of types Effect execution determining means for determining whether or not to execute a sequentially viewable effect that displays the plurality of types of character information in a predetermined order so as to be visible to the player using the effect members;
When it is determined by the effect execution determination means that the sequentially viewable effect is executed, it is determined which character information of the plurality of types of character information is sequentially displayed so as to be visible to the player. For each of the determined predetermined number of pieces of character information, an expression mode for expressing the first effect image imitating the character information, an expression mode for expressing an effect member imitating the character information, or the character An effect determining means for determining one of an expression mode for expressing both the first effect image imitating information and the effect member imitating the character information;
When it is determined by the effect execution determination means to execute the sequentially viewable effect, the effect image display control means and the effect member driving means are controlled, and the sequential viewing according to the determination result of the effect determination means. Production execution means for performing possible production;
Whether or not a special effect that can be visually recognized by a player by changing a part of the plurality of types of first effect images to the one of the plurality of types of second effect images in the sequentially viewable effect Special effect execution determination means for determining whether or not,
Special effect determining means for determining which of the plurality of types of second effect images is displayed so as to be visible to the player when the special effect execution determining means determines that the special effect can be executed. ,
Whether or not the character information of the first effect image included in the expression mode whose expression is determined by the effect determination unit and the second effect image whose expression is determined by the special effect determination unit match A match determination means for determining whether or not
The production execution means
When it is determined that the character information does not match by the match determination means, while performing the sequentially visible effect without executing the special effect,
When the match determination unit determines that the character information matches, the sequential viewable effect is executed, and included in the display mode in which the display is determined by the effect determination unit in the sequentially viewable effect The game machine is characterized by executing the special effect in which the first effect image is displayed in a display manner in which the first effect image is changed to the second effect image that matches the character information . The effect execution means is capable of visually recognizing the plurality of types of character information, each of which has a unique superiority, in the predetermined order from the character information with the lower priority to the character information with the higher priority. The visual recognition effect is executed by performing the sequential visual recognition effect, and the expected degree of the specific display mode is announced in association with the superiority of the character information finally expressed according to the determination result of the effect determination means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: